1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2 % 3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5 % 6 \def\texinfoversion{2012-11-08.11} 7 % 8 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10 % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11 % 12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15 % License, or (at your option) any later version. 16 % 17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20 % General Public License for more details. 21 % 22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24 % 25 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28 % 29 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30 % reports; you can get the latest version from: 31 % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 32 % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 34 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36 % 37 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo (a] gnu.org. Please include including a 38 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40 % 41 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44 % tex foo.texi 45 % texindex foo.?? 46 % tex foo.texi 47 % tex foo.texi 48 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52 % 53 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55 % full Texinfo distribution. 56 % 57 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64 % they might have appeared in the input file name. 65 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 \chardef\other=12 69 70 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 71 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 72 \let\+ = \relax 73 74 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 75 \let\ptexb=\b 76 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet 77 \let\ptexc=\c 78 \let\ptexcomma=\, 79 \let\ptexdot=\. 80 \let\ptexdots=\dots 81 \let\ptexend=\end 82 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv 83 \let\ptexexclam=\! 84 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 85 \let\ptexgtr=> 86 \let\ptexhat=^ 87 \let\ptexi=\i 88 \let\ptexindent=\indent 89 \let\ptexinsert=\insert 90 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ 91 \let\ptexless=< 92 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 93 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 94 \let\ptexplus=+ 95 \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 96 \let\ptexrbrace=\} 97 \let\ptexslash=\/ 98 \let\ptexstar=\* 99 \let\ptext=\t 100 \let\ptextop=\top 101 {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 102 103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 104 % starts a new line in the output. 105 \newlinechar = `^^J 106 107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 109 % 110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 112 \else 113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 114 \fi 115 116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 119 \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 120 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 121 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 122 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 123 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 124 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 125 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 126 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 127 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 128 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 129 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 130 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 131 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 132 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 133 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 134 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 135 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 136 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 137 % 138 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 139 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 140 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 141 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 142 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 143 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 144 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 145 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 146 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 147 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 148 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 149 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 150 % 151 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 152 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 153 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 154 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 155 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 156 157 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 158 \chardef\spacecat = 10 159 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 160 161 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 162 \chardef\ampChar = `\& 163 \chardef\colonChar = `\: 164 \chardef\commaChar = `\, 165 \chardef\dashChar = `\- 166 \chardef\dotChar = `\. 167 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! 168 \chardef\hashChar = `\# 169 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 170 \chardef\questChar = `\? 171 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 172 \chardef\semiChar = `\; 173 \chardef\slashChar = `\/ 174 \chardef\underChar = `\_ 175 176 % Ignore a token. 177 % 178 \def\gobble#1{} 179 180 % The following is used inside several \edef's. 181 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 182 183 % Hyphenation fixes. 184 \hyphenation{ 185 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 186 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 187 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 188 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 189 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 190 spell-ing spell-ings 191 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 192 wide-spread wrap-around 193 } 194 195 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 196 \newdimen\bindingoffset 197 \newdimen\normaloffset 198 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 199 200 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles 201 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 202 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 203 % 204 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 205 206 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 207 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 208 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 209 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 210 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 211 % 212 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 213 \def\loggingall{% 214 \tracingstats2 215 \tracingpages1 216 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 217 \tracingparagraphs1 218 \tracingoutput1 219 \tracingmacros2 220 \tracingrestores1 221 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 222 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 223 \tracingscantokens1 224 \tracingifs1 225 \tracinggroups1 226 \tracingnesting2 227 \tracingassigns1 228 \fi 229 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 230 \errorcontextlines16 231 }% 232 233 % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 234 % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 235 % after all. 236 % 237 \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 238 \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 239 240 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 241 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 242 % 243 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 244 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 245 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 246 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 247 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 248 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 249 250 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 251 % 252 \newif\ifcropmarks 253 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 254 % 255 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 256 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 257 % 258 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 259 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 260 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 261 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 262 263 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 264 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 265 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 266 % 267 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 268 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 269 % 270 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 271 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 272 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 273 % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 274 % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 275 % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 276 \def\domark{% 277 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 278 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 279 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 280 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 281 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 282 \mark{% 283 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 284 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 285 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 286 }% 287 } 288 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 289 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 290 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 291 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 292 % first @chapter. 293 \def\gettopheadingmarks{% 294 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 295 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 296 } 297 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 298 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 299 300 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 301 \def\lastchapterdefs{} 302 \def\lastsectiondefs{} 303 \def\prevchapterdefs{} 304 \def\prevsectiondefs{} 305 \def\lastcolordefs{} 306 307 % Main output routine. 308 \chardef\PAGE = 255 309 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 310 311 \newbox\headlinebox 312 \newbox\footlinebox 313 314 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 315 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 316 \def\onepageout#1{% 317 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 318 % 319 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 320 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 321 % 322 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 323 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 324 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 325 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 326 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 327 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 328 % 329 {% 330 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 331 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 332 % before the \shipout runs. 333 % 334 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 335 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 336 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 337 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 338 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 339 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 340 % it needs to be 341 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 342 \shipout\vbox{% 343 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 344 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 345 % 346 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 347 \hsize = \outerhsize 348 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 349 \vtop to0pt{% 350 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 351 \nointerlineskip 352 \line{% 353 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 354 \hfill 355 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 356 }% 357 \vss}% 358 \vskip\topandbottommargin 359 \line\bgroup 360 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 361 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 362 \vbox\bgroup 363 \fi 364 % 365 \unvbox\headlinebox 366 \pagebody{#1}% 367 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 368 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 369 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 370 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 371 \vskip 24pt 372 \unvbox\footlinebox 373 \fi 374 % 375 \ifcropmarks 376 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 377 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 378 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 379 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 380 \vbox to0pt{\vss 381 \line{% 382 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 383 \hfill 384 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 385 }% 386 \nointerlineskip 387 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 388 }% 389 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 390 \fi 391 }% end of \shipout\vbox 392 }% end of group with \indexdummies 393 \advancepageno 394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 395 } 396 397 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 398 399 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 400 {\catcode`\@ =11 401 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 402 % marginal hacks, juha (a] viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 403 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 404 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 405 \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 406 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 407 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 408 } 409 410 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 411 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 412 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 413 % 414 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 415 \def\nstop{\vbox 416 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 417 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 418 \def\nsbot{\vbox 419 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 420 421 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 422 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 423 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 424 % 425 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 426 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% 427 \def\argtorun{#2}% 428 \begingroup 429 \obeylines 430 \spaceisspace 431 #1% 432 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 433 } 434 435 {\obeylines % 436 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 437 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 438 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 439 }% 440 } 441 442 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 443 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 444 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 445 446 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 447 % 448 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 449 % @end itemize @c foo 450 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 451 % by \finishparsearg. 452 % 453 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 454 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 455 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 456 \def\temp{#3}% 457 \ifx\temp\empty 458 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 459 \let\temp\finishparsearg 460 \else 461 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 462 \fi 463 % Put the space token in: 464 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 465 } 466 467 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 468 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 469 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 470 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. 471 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 472 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 473 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. 474 % 475 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 476 % 477 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 478 479 % \parseargdef\foo{...} 480 % is roughly equivalent to 481 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 482 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} 483 % 484 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 485 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 486 487 \def\parseargdef#1{% 488 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 489 } 490 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 491 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 492 \def#1##1% 493 } 494 495 % Several utility definitions with active space: 496 { 497 \obeyspaces 498 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 499 500 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 501 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 502 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 503 % should produce a line of output anyway. 504 % 505 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 506 507 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 508 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 509 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 510 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 511 } 512 513 514 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 515 516 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 517 % 518 % \envdef\foo{...} 519 % \def\Efoo{...} 520 % 521 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 522 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 523 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 524 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 525 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 526 % 527 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 528 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 529 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 530 % special case.) 531 532 533 % At run-time, environments start with this: 534 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 535 % initialize 536 \let\thisenv\empty 537 538 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 539 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 540 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 541 542 % Check whether we're in the right environment: 543 \def\checkenv#1{% 544 \def\temp{#1}% 545 \ifx\thisenv\temp 546 \else 547 \badenverr 548 \fi 549 } 550 551 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 552 \def\badenverr{% 553 \errhelp = \EMsimple 554 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 555 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 556 } 557 \def\inenvironment#1{% 558 \ifx#1\empty 559 outside of any environment% 560 \else 561 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 562 \fi 563 } 564 565 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 566 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 567 % 568 \parseargdef\end{% 569 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 570 \else 571 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 572 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 573 \csname E#1\endcsname 574 \endgroup 575 \fi 576 } 577 578 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 579 580 581 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 582 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 583 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 584 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 585 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 586 {\catcode`@ = 11 587 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 588 % if the definition is written into an index file. 589 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 590 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 591 } 592 593 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. 594 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 595 596 % @* forces a line break. 597 \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 598 599 % @/ allows a line break. 600 \let\/=\allowbreak 601 602 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. 603 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 604 605 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 606 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 607 608 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. 609 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 610 611 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 612 % 613 \def\onword{on} 614 \def\offword{off} 615 % 616 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 617 \def\temp{#1}% 618 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 619 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 620 \else 621 \errhelp = \EMsimple 622 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 623 \fi\fi 624 } 625 626 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 627 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 628 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 629 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 630 631 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 632 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 633 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 634 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 635 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 636 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 637 % the text is small, which looks bad. 638 % 639 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 640 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 641 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 642 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 643 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 644 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 645 % 646 \newbox\groupbox 647 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} 648 % 649 \envdef\group{% 650 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 651 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 652 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 653 \fi 654 \startsavinginserts 655 % 656 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 657 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 658 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 659 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 660 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 661 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 662 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 663 \comment 664 } 665 % 666 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 667 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 668 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 669 % above. But it's pretty close. 670 \def\Egroup{% 671 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 672 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 673 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 674 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 675 \egroup % End the \vtop. 676 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 677 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 678 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 679 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 680 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 681 % group, force a page break. 682 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 683 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 684 \page 685 \fi 686 \fi 687 \box\groupbox 688 \prevdepth = \dimen1 689 \checkinserts 690 } 691 % 692 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 693 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 694 % 695 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 696 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 697 where each line of input produces a line of output.} 698 699 % @need space-in-mils 700 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 701 702 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 703 704 \parseargdef\need{% 705 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 706 % paragraph. 707 \par 708 % 709 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 710 \dimen0 = #1\mil 711 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 712 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 713 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 714 % 715 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 716 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 717 % And a page break here is fine. 718 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 719 % 720 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 721 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 722 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 723 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 724 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 725 % 726 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 727 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 728 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 729 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 730 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 731 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 732 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 733 \penalty9999 734 % 735 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 736 \kern -#1\mil 737 % 738 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 739 \nobreak 740 \fi 741 } 742 743 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 744 745 \let\br = \par 746 747 % @page forces the start of a new page. 748 % 749 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 750 751 % @exdent text.... 752 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 753 754 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 755 % That's how much \exdent should take out. 756 \newskip\exdentamount 757 758 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 759 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 760 761 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 762 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 763 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 764 765 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 766 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 767 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 768 % 769 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 770 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 771 % 772 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 773 \nobreak 774 \kern-\strutdepth 775 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 776 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 777 \vss 778 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 779 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 780 \ifx#1l% 781 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 782 \else 783 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 784 \fi 785 \null 786 }% 787 }} 788 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 789 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 790 % 791 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 792 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 793 % else use TEXT for both). 794 % 795 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 796 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 797 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 798 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 799 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 800 \def\righttext{#2}% 801 \else 802 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 803 \def\righttext{#1}% 804 \fi 805 % 806 \ifodd\pageno 807 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 808 \else 809 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 810 \fi 811 \temp 812 } 813 814 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 815 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 816 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 817 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 818 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command 819 % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work. 820 % 821 \def\|{% 822 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 823 \leavevmode 824 % 825 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 826 \vadjust{% 827 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 828 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 829 \vskip-\baselineskip 830 % 831 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 832 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 833 \llap{% 834 % 835 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 836 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 837 % 838 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 839 \hskip 12pt 840 }% 841 }% 842 } 843 844 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 845 % 846 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 847 \def\includezzz#1{% 848 \pushthisfilestack 849 \def\thisfile{#1}% 850 {% 851 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 852 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 853 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 854 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 855 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 856 % 857 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 858 % definitions, etc. 859 \expandafter 860 }\temp 861 \popthisfilestack 862 } 863 \def\filenamecatcodes{% 864 \catcode`\\=\other 865 \catcode`~=\other 866 \catcode`^=\other 867 \catcode`_=\other 868 \catcode`|=\other 869 \catcode`<=\other 870 \catcode`>=\other 871 \catcode`+=\other 872 \catcode`-=\other 873 \catcode`\`=\other 874 \catcode`\'=\other 875 } 876 877 \def\pushthisfilestack{% 878 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 879 } 880 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% 881 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 882 } 883 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 884 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 885 } 886 887 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 888 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 889 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 890 % 891 \def\thisfile{} 892 893 % @center line 894 % outputs that line, centered. 895 % 896 \parseargdef\center{% 897 \ifhmode 898 \let\centersub\centerH 899 \else 900 \let\centersub\centerV 901 \fi 902 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 903 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 904 } 905 \def\centerH#1{{% 906 \hfil\break 907 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 908 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 909 \line{#1}% 910 \break 911 }} 912 % 913 \newcount\centerpenalty 914 \def\centerV#1{% 915 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 916 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 917 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 918 % prevent a page break here. 919 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 920 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 921 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 922 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 923 } 924 925 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 926 % 927 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 928 929 % @comment ...line which is ignored... 930 % @c is the same as @comment 931 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 932 % 933 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 934 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 935 \commentxxx} 936 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 937 % 938 \let\c=\comment 939 940 % @paragraphindent NCHARS 941 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 942 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 943 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 944 % 945 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 946 \def\noneword{none} 947 % 948 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 949 \def\temp{#1}% 950 \ifx\temp\asisword 951 \else 952 \ifx\temp\noneword 953 \defaultparindent = 0pt 954 \else 955 \defaultparindent = #1em 956 \fi 957 \fi 958 \parindent = \defaultparindent 959 } 960 961 % @exampleindent NCHARS 962 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 963 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 964 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 965 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% 966 \def\temp{#1}% 967 \ifx\temp\asisword 968 \else 969 \ifx\temp\noneword 970 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 971 \else 972 \lispnarrowing = #1em 973 \fi 974 \fi 975 } 976 977 % @firstparagraphindent WORD 978 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 979 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 980 % paragraphs. 981 % 982 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 983 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 984 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 985 % By default, we suppress indentation. 986 % 987 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 988 \def\insertword{insert} 989 % 990 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 991 \def\temp{#1}% 992 \ifx\temp\noneword 993 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 994 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 995 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 996 \else 997 \errhelp = \EMsimple 998 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 999 \fi\fi 1000 } 1001 1002 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1003 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1004 % 1005 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1006 % paragraph. 1007 % 1008 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1009 \gdef\indent{% 1010 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1011 \indent 1012 }% 1013 \gdef\noindent{% 1014 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1015 \noindent 1016 }% 1017 \global\everypar = {% 1018 \kern -\parindent 1019 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1020 }% 1021 } 1022 1023 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1024 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1025 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1026 \global \everypar = {}% 1027 } 1028 1029 1030 % @refill is a no-op. 1031 \let\refill=\relax 1032 1033 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1034 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1035 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1036 % 1037 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1038 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1039 1040 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1041 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1042 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1043 \def\setfilename{% 1044 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1045 \iflinks 1046 \tryauxfile 1047 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1048 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1049 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1050 \openindices 1051 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1052 % 1053 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1054 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1055 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1056 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1057 \closein 1 1058 % 1059 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1060 } 1061 1062 % Called from \setfilename. 1063 % 1064 \def\openindices{% 1065 \newindex{cp}% 1066 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1067 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1068 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1069 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1070 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1071 } 1072 1073 % @bye. 1074 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1075 1076 1077 \message{pdf,} 1078 % adobe `portable' document format 1079 \newcount\tempnum 1080 \newcount\lnkcount 1081 \newtoks\filename 1082 \newcount\filenamelength 1083 \newcount\pgn 1084 \newtoks\toksA 1085 \newtoks\toksB 1086 \newtoks\toksC 1087 \newtoks\toksD 1088 \newbox\boxA 1089 \newcount\countA 1090 \newif\ifpdf 1091 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1092 1093 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1094 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1095 \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1096 \else 1097 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1098 \else 1099 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1100 \else 1101 \pdftrue 1102 \fi 1103 \fi 1104 \fi 1105 1106 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1107 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1108 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1109 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1110 % 1111 % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1112 % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1113 % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1114 % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1115 % do this reliably, so we use it. 1116 1117 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1118 % which we \xdef. 1119 \def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1120 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1121 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1122 % Many times it won't matter. 1123 \else 1124 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1125 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1126 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1127 \fi 1128 } 1129 1130 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1131 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1132 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1133 output) for that.)} 1134 1135 \ifpdf 1136 % 1137 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, 1138 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1139 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1140 % of actual black. 1141 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1142 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1143 % 1144 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1145 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1146 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1147 % 1148 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1149 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1150 \def\setcolor#1{% 1151 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1152 \domark 1153 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1154 } 1155 % 1156 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1157 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1158 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1159 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1160 % 1161 \def\makefootline{% 1162 \baselineskip24pt 1163 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1164 } 1165 % 1166 \def\makeheadline{% 1167 \vbox to 0pt{% 1168 \vskip-22.5pt 1169 \line{% 1170 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1171 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1172 \getcolormarks 1173 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1174 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1175 }% 1176 \vss 1177 }% 1178 \nointerlineskip 1179 } 1180 % 1181 % 1182 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1183 % 1184 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1185 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1186 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1187 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1188 % 1189 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1190 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1191 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1192 % bitmap. 1193 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1194 \begingroup 1195 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1196 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1197 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1198 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1199 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1200 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1201 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1202 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1203 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1204 \fi 1205 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1206 \fi 1207 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1208 \fi 1209 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1210 \fi 1211 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1212 \fi 1213 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1214 \fi 1215 \closein 1 1216 \endgroup 1217 % 1218 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1219 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1220 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1221 \immediate\pdfimage 1222 \else 1223 \immediate\pdfximage 1224 \fi 1225 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1226 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1227 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1228 #1.\pdfimgext 1229 \else 1230 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1231 \fi 1232 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1233 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1234 \fi} 1235 % 1236 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1237 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1238 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1239 \indexnofonts 1240 \turnoffactive 1241 \makevalueexpandable 1242 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1243 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1244 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1245 }} 1246 % 1247 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1248 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1249 % 1250 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1251 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1252 \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1253 \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1254 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1255 % 1256 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1257 % come from Petr Olsak 1258 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1259 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1260 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1261 \advance\tempnum by 1 1262 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1263 % 1264 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1265 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1266 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1267 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1268 % #4 is the page number 1269 % 1270 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1271 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1272 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1273 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1274 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1275 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1276 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1277 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1278 \else 1279 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest 1280 \fi 1281 % 1282 % Also escape PDF chars in the display string. 1283 \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1284 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1285 % 1286 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1287 } 1288 % 1289 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1290 \begingroup 1291 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1292 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1293 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1294 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1295 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1296 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1297 }% 1298 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1299 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1300 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1301 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1302 }% 1303 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1304 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1305 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1306 }% 1307 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1308 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1309 }% 1310 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1311 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1312 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1313 % 1314 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1315 % al. a second time, below. 1316 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1317 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1318 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1319 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1320 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1321 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1322 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1323 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1324 \readdatafile{toc}% 1325 % 1326 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1327 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1328 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1329 % 1330 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1331 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1332 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1333 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1334 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1335 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1336 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1337 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1338 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1339 % 1340 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1341 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1342 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1343 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1344 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1345 % 1346 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1347 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1348 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1349 % we use for the index sort strings. 1350 % 1351 \indexnofonts 1352 \setupdatafile 1353 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1354 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1355 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1356 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1357 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1358 \input \tocreadfilename 1359 \endgroup 1360 } 1361 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1362 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1363 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1364 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1365 ] 1366 % 1367 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1368 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1369 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1370 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1371 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1372 \fi 1373 \nextsp} 1374 \def\getfilename#1{% 1375 \filenamelength=0 1376 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1377 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1378 \edef\temp{#1}% 1379 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1380 } 1381 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1382 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1383 \else 1384 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1385 \fi 1386 % make a live url in pdf output. 1387 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1388 \begingroup 1389 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1390 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1391 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1392 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1393 % 1394 \normalturnoffactive 1395 \def\@{@}% 1396 \let\/=\empty 1397 \makevalueexpandable 1398 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1399 % special-casing \var here? 1400 \def\var##1{##1}% 1401 % 1402 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1403 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1404 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1405 \endgroup} 1406 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1407 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1408 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1409 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1410 \def\maketoks{% 1411 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1412 \ifx\first0\adn0 1413 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1414 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1415 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1416 \else 1417 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1418 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1419 \let\next=\maketoks 1420 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1421 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1422 \fi 1423 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1424 \next} 1425 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1426 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1427 \def\pdflink#1{% 1428 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1429 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1430 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1431 \else 1432 % non-pdf mode 1433 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1434 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1435 \let\endlink = \relax 1436 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1437 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1438 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1439 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1440 1441 1442 \message{fonts,} 1443 1444 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1445 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1446 % italics, not bold italics. 1447 % 1448 \def\setfontstyle#1{% 1449 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1450 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1451 } 1452 1453 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1454 % 1455 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1456 1457 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1458 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1459 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1460 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1461 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1462 1463 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since 1464 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. 1465 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} 1466 1467 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1468 % So we set up a \sf. 1469 \newfam\sffam 1470 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1471 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1472 1473 % We don't need math for this font style. 1474 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1475 1476 1477 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1478 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1479 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1480 % 1481 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1482 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1483 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1484 % 1485 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1486 \def\baselinefactor{1} 1487 % 1488 \newdimen\textleading 1489 \def\setleading#1{% 1490 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1491 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1492 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1493 \normalbaselines 1494 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1495 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1496 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1497 }% 1498 } 1499 1500 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1501 % 1502 % do nothing with this by default. 1503 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1504 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1505 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1506 1507 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1508 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1509 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1510 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1511 \begingroup 1512 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1513 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1514 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1515 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1516 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1517 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1518 %%Version: 1.000 1519 %%EndComments 1520 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1521 12 dict begin 1522 begincmap 1523 /CIDSystemInfo 1524 << /Registry (TeX) 1525 /Ordering (OT1) 1526 /Supplement 0 1527 >> def 1528 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1529 /CMapType 2 def 1530 1 begincodespacerange 1531 <00> <7F> 1532 endcodespacerange 1533 8 beginbfrange 1534 <00> <01> <0393> 1535 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1536 <23> <26> <0023> 1537 <28> <3B> <0028> 1538 <3F> <5B> <003F> 1539 <5D> <5E> <005D> 1540 <61> <7A> <0061> 1541 <7B> <7C> <2013> 1542 endbfrange 1543 40 beginbfchar 1544 <02> <0398> 1545 <03> <039B> 1546 <04> <039E> 1547 <05> <03A0> 1548 <06> <03A3> 1549 <07> <03D2> 1550 <08> <03A6> 1551 <0B> <00660066> 1552 <0C> <00660069> 1553 <0D> <0066006C> 1554 <0E> <006600660069> 1555 <0F> <00660066006C> 1556 <10> <0131> 1557 <11> <0237> 1558 <12> <0060> 1559 <13> <00B4> 1560 <14> <02C7> 1561 <15> <02D8> 1562 <16> <00AF> 1563 <17> <02DA> 1564 <18> <00B8> 1565 <19> <00DF> 1566 <1A> <00E6> 1567 <1B> <0153> 1568 <1C> <00F8> 1569 <1D> <00C6> 1570 <1E> <0152> 1571 <1F> <00D8> 1572 <21> <0021> 1573 <22> <201D> 1574 <27> <2019> 1575 <3C> <00A1> 1576 <3D> <003D> 1577 <3E> <00BF> 1578 <5C> <201C> 1579 <5F> <02D9> 1580 <60> <2018> 1581 <7D> <02DD> 1582 <7E> <007E> 1583 <7F> <00A8> 1584 endbfchar 1585 endcmap 1586 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1587 end 1588 end 1589 %%EndResource 1590 %%EOF 1591 }\endgroup 1592 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1593 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1594 }% 1595 % 1596 % \cmapOT1IT 1597 \begingroup 1598 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1599 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1600 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1601 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1602 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1603 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1604 %%Version: 1.000 1605 %%EndComments 1606 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1607 12 dict begin 1608 begincmap 1609 /CIDSystemInfo 1610 << /Registry (TeX) 1611 /Ordering (OT1IT) 1612 /Supplement 0 1613 >> def 1614 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1615 /CMapType 2 def 1616 1 begincodespacerange 1617 <00> <7F> 1618 endcodespacerange 1619 8 beginbfrange 1620 <00> <01> <0393> 1621 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1622 <25> <26> <0025> 1623 <28> <3B> <0028> 1624 <3F> <5B> <003F> 1625 <5D> <5E> <005D> 1626 <61> <7A> <0061> 1627 <7B> <7C> <2013> 1628 endbfrange 1629 42 beginbfchar 1630 <02> <0398> 1631 <03> <039B> 1632 <04> <039E> 1633 <05> <03A0> 1634 <06> <03A3> 1635 <07> <03D2> 1636 <08> <03A6> 1637 <0B> <00660066> 1638 <0C> <00660069> 1639 <0D> <0066006C> 1640 <0E> <006600660069> 1641 <0F> <00660066006C> 1642 <10> <0131> 1643 <11> <0237> 1644 <12> <0060> 1645 <13> <00B4> 1646 <14> <02C7> 1647 <15> <02D8> 1648 <16> <00AF> 1649 <17> <02DA> 1650 <18> <00B8> 1651 <19> <00DF> 1652 <1A> <00E6> 1653 <1B> <0153> 1654 <1C> <00F8> 1655 <1D> <00C6> 1656 <1E> <0152> 1657 <1F> <00D8> 1658 <21> <0021> 1659 <22> <201D> 1660 <23> <0023> 1661 <24> <00A3> 1662 <27> <2019> 1663 <3C> <00A1> 1664 <3D> <003D> 1665 <3E> <00BF> 1666 <5C> <201C> 1667 <5F> <02D9> 1668 <60> <2018> 1669 <7D> <02DD> 1670 <7E> <007E> 1671 <7F> <00A8> 1672 endbfchar 1673 endcmap 1674 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1675 end 1676 end 1677 %%EndResource 1678 %%EOF 1679 }\endgroup 1680 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1681 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1682 }% 1683 % 1684 % \cmapOT1TT 1685 \begingroup 1686 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1687 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1688 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1689 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1690 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1691 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1692 %%Version: 1.000 1693 %%EndComments 1694 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1695 12 dict begin 1696 begincmap 1697 /CIDSystemInfo 1698 << /Registry (TeX) 1699 /Ordering (OT1TT) 1700 /Supplement 0 1701 >> def 1702 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1703 /CMapType 2 def 1704 1 begincodespacerange 1705 <00> <7F> 1706 endcodespacerange 1707 5 beginbfrange 1708 <00> <01> <0393> 1709 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1710 <21> <26> <0021> 1711 <28> <5F> <0028> 1712 <61> <7E> <0061> 1713 endbfrange 1714 32 beginbfchar 1715 <02> <0398> 1716 <03> <039B> 1717 <04> <039E> 1718 <05> <03A0> 1719 <06> <03A3> 1720 <07> <03D2> 1721 <08> <03A6> 1722 <0B> <2191> 1723 <0C> <2193> 1724 <0D> <0027> 1725 <0E> <00A1> 1726 <0F> <00BF> 1727 <10> <0131> 1728 <11> <0237> 1729 <12> <0060> 1730 <13> <00B4> 1731 <14> <02C7> 1732 <15> <02D8> 1733 <16> <00AF> 1734 <17> <02DA> 1735 <18> <00B8> 1736 <19> <00DF> 1737 <1A> <00E6> 1738 <1B> <0153> 1739 <1C> <00F8> 1740 <1D> <00C6> 1741 <1E> <0152> 1742 <1F> <00D8> 1743 <20> <2423> 1744 <27> <2019> 1745 <60> <2018> 1746 <7F> <00A8> 1747 endbfchar 1748 endcmap 1749 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1750 end 1751 end 1752 %%EndResource 1753 %%EOF 1754 }\endgroup 1755 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1756 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1757 }% 1758 \fi\fi 1759 1760 1761 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 1762 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1763 % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 1764 % Example: 1765 % #1 = \textrm 1766 % #2 = \rmshape 1767 % #3 = 10 1768 % #4 = \mainmagstep 1769 % #5 = OT1 1770 % 1771 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1772 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1773 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1774 } 1775 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1776 \let\cmap\gobble 1777 % 1778 % (end of cmaps) 1779 1780 % Use cm as the default font prefix. 1781 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1782 % before you read in texinfo.tex. 1783 \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 1784 \def\fontprefix{cm} 1785 \fi 1786 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1787 \def\rmshape{r} 1788 \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 1789 \def\bfshape{b} 1790 \def\bxshape{bx} 1791 \def\ttshape{tt} 1792 \def\ttbshape{tt} 1793 \def\ttslshape{sltt} 1794 \def\itshape{ti} 1795 \def\itbshape{bxti} 1796 \def\slshape{sl} 1797 \def\slbshape{bxsl} 1798 \def\sfshape{ss} 1799 \def\sfbshape{ss} 1800 \def\scshape{csc} 1801 \def\scbshape{csc} 1802 1803 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 1804 % 1805 \def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1806 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1807 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1808 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1809 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1810 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1811 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1812 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1813 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1814 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1815 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1816 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1817 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1818 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1819 \def\textecsize{1095} 1820 1821 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1822 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1823 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1824 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1825 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1826 1827 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1828 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1829 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1830 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1831 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1832 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1833 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1834 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1835 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1836 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1837 \font\smalli=cmmi9 1838 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 1839 \def\smallecsize{0900} 1840 1841 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1842 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1843 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1844 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1845 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1846 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1847 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1848 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1849 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1850 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1851 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 1852 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 1853 \def\smallerecsize{0800} 1854 1855 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1856 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1857 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1858 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1859 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1860 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1861 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1862 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1863 \let\titlebf=\titlerm 1864 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1865 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1866 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1867 \def\titleecsize{2074} 1868 1869 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 1870 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 1871 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1872 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 1873 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1874 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1875 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1876 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 1877 \let\chapbf=\chaprm 1878 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1879 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 1880 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 1881 \def\chapecsize{1728} 1882 1883 % Section fonts (14.4pt). 1884 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} 1885 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1886 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 1887 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1888 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1889 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1890 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1891 \let\secbf\secrm 1892 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1893 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 1894 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 1895 \def\sececsize{1440} 1896 1897 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 1898 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 1899 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1900 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 1901 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1902 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1903 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 1904 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1905 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm 1906 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1907 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 1908 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 1909 \def\ssececsize{1200} 1910 1911 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 1912 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 1913 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1914 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1915 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1916 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 1917 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1918 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1919 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1920 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1921 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 1922 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 1923 \def\reducedecsize{1000} 1924 1925 \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 1926 \textfonts % reset the current fonts 1927 \rm 1928 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 1929 1930 1931 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 1932 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 1933 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 1934 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 1935 % 1936 \def\definetextfontsizex{% 1937 % Text fonts (10pt). 1938 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} 1939 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} 1940 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1941 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1942 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1943 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1944 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1945 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1946 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1947 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1948 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1949 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1950 \def\textecsize{1000} 1951 1952 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1953 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1954 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1955 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1956 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1957 1958 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1959 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1960 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1961 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1962 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1963 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1964 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1965 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1966 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1967 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1968 \font\smalli=cmmi9 1969 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 1970 \def\smallecsize{0900} 1971 1972 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1973 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1974 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1975 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1976 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1977 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1978 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1979 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1980 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1981 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1982 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 1983 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 1984 \def\smallerecsize{0800} 1985 1986 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1987 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1988 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1989 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1990 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1991 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1992 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1993 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1994 \let\titlebf=\titlerm 1995 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1996 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1997 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1998 \def\titleecsize{2074} 1999 2000 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2001 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2002 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2003 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2004 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2005 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2006 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2007 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2008 \let\chapbf\chaprm 2009 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2010 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2011 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2012 \def\chapecsize{1440} 2013 2014 % Section fonts (12pt). 2015 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2016 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2017 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2018 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2019 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2020 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2021 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2022 \let\secbf\secrm 2023 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2024 \font\seci=cmmi12 2025 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2026 \def\sececsize{1200} 2027 2028 % Subsection fonts (10pt). 2029 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2030 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2031 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2032 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2033 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2034 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2035 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2036 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2037 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2038 \font\sseci=cmmi10 2039 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2040 \def\ssececsize{1000} 2041 2042 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2043 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2044 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2045 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2046 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2047 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2048 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2049 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2050 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2051 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2052 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 2053 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2054 \def\reducedecsize{0900} 2055 2056 \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2057 \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2058 \textfonts % reset the current fonts 2059 \rm 2060 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2061 2062 2063 % We provide the user-level command 2064 % @fonttextsize 10 2065 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2066 % 2067 \def\xiword{11} 2068 \def\xword{10} 2069 \def\xwordpt{10pt} 2070 % 2071 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2072 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2073 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2074 % 2075 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2076 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2077 % 2078 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2079 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2080 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2081 \else 2082 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2083 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2084 \fi\fi 2085 \endgroup 2086 } 2087 2088 2089 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2090 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2091 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2092 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2093 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2094 % 2095 \def\resetmathfonts{% 2096 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2097 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2098 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2099 } 2100 2101 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2102 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2103 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2104 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2105 % 2106 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2107 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2108 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2109 % 2110 % This all needs generalizing, badly. 2111 % 2112 \def\textfonts{% 2113 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2114 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2115 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2116 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2117 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2118 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2119 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2120 \def\titlefonts{% 2121 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2122 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2123 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2124 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2125 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2126 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2127 \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}} 2128 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} 2129 \def\chapfonts{% 2130 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2131 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2132 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2133 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2134 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2135 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2136 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2137 \def\secfonts{% 2138 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2139 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2140 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2141 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2142 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2143 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2144 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2145 \def\subsecfonts{% 2146 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2147 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2148 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2149 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2150 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2151 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2152 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2153 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2154 \def\reducedfonts{% 2155 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2156 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2157 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2158 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2159 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2160 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2161 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2162 \def\smallfonts{% 2163 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2164 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2165 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2166 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2167 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2168 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2169 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2170 \def\smallerfonts{% 2171 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2172 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2173 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2174 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2175 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2176 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2177 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2178 2179 % Fonts for short table of contents. 2180 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2181 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2182 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2183 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2184 2185 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2186 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2187 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2188 2189 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2190 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2191 2192 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2193 % can fit this many characters: 2194 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2195 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2196 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2197 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2198 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2199 % 2200 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2201 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2202 % --karl, 24jan03. 2203 2204 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2205 % 2206 \definetextfontsizexi 2207 2208 2209 \message{markup,} 2210 2211 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2212 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2213 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2214 % this property, we can check that font parameter. 2215 % 2216 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2217 2218 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2219 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2220 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2221 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2222 % currently in effect. 2223 \newif\ifmarkupvar 2224 \newif\ifmarkupsamp 2225 \newif\ifmarkupkey 2226 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2227 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2228 \newif\ifmarkupcode 2229 \newif\ifmarkupkbd 2230 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2231 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2232 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2233 \newif\ifmarkupexample 2234 \newif\ifmarkupverb 2235 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2236 2237 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2238 2239 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2240 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2241 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2242 \markupstylesetup 2243 } 2244 2245 \let\markupstylesetup\empty 2246 2247 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2248 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2249 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2250 \def#1% 2251 } 2252 2253 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2254 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2255 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2256 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2257 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2258 } 2259 2260 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2261 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2262 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2263 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2264 } 2265 2266 { 2267 \catcode`\'=\active 2268 \catcode`\`=\active 2269 2270 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2271 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2272 2273 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2274 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2275 } 2276 2277 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2278 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2279 % 2280 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2281 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2282 % 2283 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2284 \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2285 % 2286 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2287 \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2288 % 2289 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2290 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2291 % 2292 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2293 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2294 2295 % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2296 % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2297 % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2298 % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2299 % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2300 % 2301 \def\codequoteright{% 2302 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2303 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2304 '% 2305 \else \char'15 \fi 2306 \else \char'15 \fi 2307 } 2308 % 2309 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2310 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2311 % the code environments to do likewise. 2312 % 2313 \def\codequoteleft{% 2314 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2315 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2316 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2317 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2318 \relax`% 2319 \else \char'22 \fi 2320 \else \char'22 \fi 2321 } 2322 2323 % Commands to set the quote options. 2324 % 2325 \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2326 \def\temp{#1}% 2327 \ifx\temp\onword 2328 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2329 = t% 2330 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2331 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2332 = \relax 2333 \else 2334 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2335 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2336 \fi\fi 2337 } 2338 % 2339 \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2340 \def\temp{#1}% 2341 \ifx\temp\onword 2342 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2343 = t% 2344 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2345 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2346 = \relax 2347 \else 2348 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2349 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2350 \fi\fi 2351 } 2352 2353 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2354 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2355 2356 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2357 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2358 2359 % Font commands. 2360 2361 % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2362 % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2363 % and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2364 \def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2365 \ifusingtt 2366 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2367 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2368 \next 2369 } 2370 \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2371 \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2372 2373 % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2374 % character) is such as not to need one. 2375 \def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2376 \ifx\next,% 2377 \else\ifx\next-% 2378 \else\ifx\next.% 2379 \else\ptexslash 2380 \fi\fi\fi 2381 \aftersmartic 2382 } 2383 2384 % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2385 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2386 2387 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2388 % ttsl for book titles, do we? 2389 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2390 2391 \def\aftersmartic{} 2392 \def\var#1{% 2393 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2394 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2395 \smartslanted{#1}% 2396 } 2397 2398 \let\i=\smartitalic 2399 \let\slanted=\smartslanted 2400 \let\dfn=\smartslanted 2401 \let\emph=\smartitalic 2402 2403 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2404 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2405 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2406 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2407 2408 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2409 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2410 \let\strong=\b 2411 2412 % @sansserif, explicit sans. 2413 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2414 2415 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2416 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2417 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2418 % 2419 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2420 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2421 2422 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2423 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2424 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2425 % 2426 \catcode`@=11 2427 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2428 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2429 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2430 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2431 } 2432 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2433 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2434 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2435 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2436 } 2437 \catcode`@=\other 2438 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2439 2440 % @t, explicit typewriter. 2441 \def\t#1{% 2442 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2443 \null 2444 } 2445 2446 % @samp. 2447 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2448 2449 % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2450 \let\indicateurl=\samp 2451 2452 % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2453 % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2454 % This is a subroutine for that. 2455 \def\tclose#1{% 2456 {% 2457 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2458 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2459 % 2460 % Switch to typewriter. 2461 \tt 2462 % 2463 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2464 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2465 % 2466 % Turn off hyphenation. 2467 \nohyphenation 2468 % 2469 \rawbackslash 2470 \plainfrenchspacing 2471 #1% 2472 }% 2473 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2474 } 2475 2476 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2477 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2478 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2479 % 2480 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2481 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2482 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2483 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2484 % -- rms. 2485 { 2486 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2487 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2488 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2489 % 2490 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2491 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2492 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2493 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2494 \ifallowcodebreaks 2495 \let-\codedash 2496 \let_\codeunder 2497 \else 2498 \let-\realdash 2499 \let_\realunder 2500 \fi 2501 \codex 2502 } 2503 } 2504 2505 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2506 2507 \def\realdash{-} 2508 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2509 \def\codeunder{% 2510 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2511 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2512 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2513 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2514 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2515 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2516 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2517 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2518 {\_}% 2519 } 2520 2521 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2522 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2523 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2524 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2525 % 2526 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2527 2528 \def\keywordtrue{true} 2529 \def\keywordfalse{false} 2530 2531 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2532 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2533 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2534 \allowcodebreakstrue 2535 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2536 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2537 \else 2538 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2539 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2540 \fi\fi 2541 } 2542 2543 % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2544 % so use \code rather than \samp. 2545 \let\command=\code 2546 \let\env=\code 2547 \let\file=\code 2548 \let\option=\code 2549 2550 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2551 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2552 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2553 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2554 % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while 2555 % for comparison.) 2556 \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish} 2557 \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2558 \unsepspaces 2559 \pdfurl{#1}% 2560 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2561 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2562 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2563 \else 2564 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2565 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2566 \ifpdf 2567 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2568 \else 2569 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2570 \fi 2571 \else 2572 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2573 \fi 2574 \fi 2575 \endlink 2576 \endgroup} 2577 2578 % This \urefbreak definition is the active one. 2579 \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2580 \let\uref=\urefbreak 2581 \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2582 \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2583 \unsepspaces 2584 \pdfurl{#1}% 2585 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2586 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2587 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2588 \else 2589 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2590 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2591 \ifpdf 2592 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2593 \else 2594 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2595 \fi 2596 \else 2597 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 2598 \fi 2599 \fi 2600 \endlink 2601 \endgroup} 2602 2603 % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 2604 \def\urefcatcodes{% 2605 \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active 2606 \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active 2607 \catcode\slashChar=\active 2608 } 2609 { 2610 \urefcatcodes 2611 % 2612 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 2613 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2614 \urefcatcodes 2615 \let&\urefcodeamp 2616 \let.\urefcodedot 2617 \let#\urefcodehash 2618 \let?\urefcodequest 2619 \let/\urefcodeslash 2620 \codex 2621 } 2622 % 2623 % By default, they are just regular characters. 2624 \global\def&{\normalamp} 2625 \global\def.{\normaldot} 2626 \global\def#{\normalhash} 2627 \global\def?{\normalquest} 2628 \global\def/{\normalslash} 2629 } 2630 2631 % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 2632 % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 2633 % cmtt at least, especially for dots. 2634 \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em } 2635 \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em } 2636 % 2637 \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 2638 \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 2639 \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 2640 \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 2641 \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 2642 { 2643 \catcode`\/=\active 2644 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 2645 \urefprestretch \slashChar 2646 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 2647 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 2648 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 2649 } 2650 } 2651 2652 % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 2653 % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 2654 % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 2655 % 2656 \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 2657 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2658 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 2659 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2660 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 2661 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2662 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 2663 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 2664 \else 2665 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2666 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2667 \fi\fi\fi 2668 } 2669 \def\wordafter{after} 2670 \def\wordbefore{before} 2671 \def\wordnone{none} 2672 2673 \urefbreakstyle after 2674 2675 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2676 % 2677 \let\url=\uref 2678 2679 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2680 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2681 % 2682 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2683 \ifpdf 2684 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2685 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2686 \unsepspaces 2687 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2688 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2689 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2690 \endlink 2691 \endgroup} 2692 \else 2693 \let\email=\uref 2694 \fi 2695 2696 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2697 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2698 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2699 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2700 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2701 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2702 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2703 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2704 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2705 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2706 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2707 \else 2708 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2709 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2710 \fi\fi\fi 2711 } 2712 \def\worddistinct{distinct} 2713 \def\wordexample{example} 2714 \def\wordcode{code} 2715 2716 % Default is `distinct'. 2717 \kbdinputstyle distinct 2718 2719 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2720 % then @kbd has no effect. 2721 \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 2722 2723 \def\xkey{\key} 2724 \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 2725 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2726 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2727 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2728 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2729 } 2730 2731 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 2732 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2733 %\font\keysy=cmsy9 2734 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2735 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2736 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2737 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2738 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2739 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2740 2741 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 2742 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 2743 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 2744 % 2745 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 2746 \nohyphenation 2747 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 2748 #1}\null} 2749 2750 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2751 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2752 2753 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2754 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2755 \def\click{\arrow} 2756 2757 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2758 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2759 % 2760 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2761 2762 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2763 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2764 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2765 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2766 2767 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2768 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2769 % all-uppercase. 2770 % 2771 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2772 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2773 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2774 \def\temp{#2}% 2775 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2776 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2777 \fi 2778 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2779 } 2780 2781 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2782 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2783 % 2784 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2785 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2786 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2787 \def\temp{#2}% 2788 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2789 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2790 \fi 2791 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2792 } 2793 2794 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 2795 % 2796 \def\asis#1{#1} 2797 2798 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. 2799 % 2800 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 2801 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 2802 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 2803 % which is what @var uses. 2804 { 2805 \catcode`\_ = \active 2806 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 2807 \catcode`\_=\active 2808 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 2809 } 2810 } 2811 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 2812 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 2813 % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 2814 % 2815 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 2816 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 2817 % 2818 \def\math{% 2819 \tex 2820 \mathunderscore 2821 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 2822 \mathactive 2823 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 2824 \let\"=\ddot 2825 \let\'=\acute 2826 \let\==\bar 2827 \let\^=\hat 2828 \let\`=\grave 2829 \let\u=\breve 2830 \let\v=\check 2831 \let\~=\tilde 2832 \let\dotaccent=\dot 2833 $\finishmath 2834 } 2835 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 2836 2837 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 2838 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 2839 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 2840 % 2841 { 2842 \catcode`^ = \active 2843 \catcode`< = \active 2844 \catcode`> = \active 2845 \catcode`+ = \active 2846 \catcode`' = \active 2847 \gdef\mathactive{% 2848 \let^ = \ptexhat 2849 \let< = \ptexless 2850 \let> = \ptexgtr 2851 \let+ = \ptexplus 2852 \let' = \ptexquoteright 2853 } 2854 } 2855 2856 % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun. 2857 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2858 2859 % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 2860 % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 2861 % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 2862 % 2863 \def\outfmtnametex{tex} 2864 % 2865 \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 2866 \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 2867 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 2868 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2869 } 2870 % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 2871 % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 2872 % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 2873 % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 2874 % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 2875 % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 2876 % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 2877 % 2878 \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 2879 \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 2880 \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 2881 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 2882 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2883 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 2884 } 2885 2886 2887 \message{glyphs,} 2888 % and logos. 2889 2890 % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 2891 \def\@{\char64 } 2892 \let\atchar=\@ 2893 2894 % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 2895 % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do 2896 % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math. 2897 \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}} 2898 \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}} 2899 \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{ 2900 \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\} 2901 \begingroup 2902 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 2903 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 2904 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 2905 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 2906 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 2907 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 2908 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 2909 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 2910 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 2911 !endgroup 2912 2913 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 2914 \let\comma = , 2915 2916 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 2917 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 2918 \let\, = \ptexc 2919 \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 2920 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 2921 \let\tieaccent = \ptext 2922 \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 2923 \let\udotaccent = \d 2924 2925 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 2926 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 2927 \def\questiondown{?`} 2928 \def\exclamdown{!`} 2929 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 2930 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 2931 2932 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 2933 \def\imacro{i} 2934 \def\jmacro{j} 2935 \def\dotless#1{% 2936 \def\temp{#1}% 2937 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 2938 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 2939 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 2940 \fi\fi 2941 } 2942 2943 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 2944 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 2945 % 2946 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 2947 2948 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 2949 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 2950 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 2951 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 2952 % \scriptscriptstyle). 2953 % 2954 \def\LaTeX{% 2955 L\kern-.36em 2956 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 2957 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 2958 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 2959 % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 2960 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 2961 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 2962 \else 2963 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 2964 \selectfonts\lllsize A% 2965 \fi 2966 }% 2967 \vss 2968 }}% 2969 \kern-.15em 2970 \TeX 2971 } 2972 2973 % Some math mode symbols. 2974 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 2975 \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} 2976 \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} 2977 \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} 2978 2979 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 2980 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 2981 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 2982 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 2983 % whichever is larger. 2984 % 2985 \def\dots{% 2986 \leavevmode 2987 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 2988 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 2989 \dimen0 = \wd0 2990 \else 2991 \dimen0 = 1.5em 2992 \fi 2993 \hbox to \dimen0{% 2994 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 2995 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 2996 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 2997 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 2998 }% 2999 } 3000 3001 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3002 % 3003 \def\enddots{% 3004 \dots 3005 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3006 } 3007 3008 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3009 % 3010 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3011 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3012 % 3013 \def\point{$\star$} 3014 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3015 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3016 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3017 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3018 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3019 3020 % The @error{} command. 3021 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3022 % 3023 \newbox\errorbox 3024 % 3025 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3026 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3027 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3028 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3029 % 3030 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3031 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3032 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3033 \vbox{% 3034 \hrule height\dimen2 3035 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3036 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3037 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3038 \hrule height\dimen2} 3039 \hfil} 3040 % 3041 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3042 3043 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3044 % 3045 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3046 3047 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3048 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3049 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3050 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3051 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3052 % 3053 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3054 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3055 % font height. 3056 % 3057 % feymr - regular 3058 % feymo - slanted 3059 % feybr - bold 3060 % feybo - bold slanted 3061 % 3062 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3063 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3064 % Hmm. 3065 % 3066 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3067 % Hope not. 3068 % 3069 % 3070 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3071 \def\eurofont{% 3072 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3073 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3074 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3075 % font installed. 3076 % 3077 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3078 % that to the current nominal size. 3079 % 3080 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3081 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3082 % 3083 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3084 % 3085 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3086 % bold: 3087 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3088 \else 3089 % regular: 3090 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3091 \fi 3092 \thiseurofont 3093 } 3094 3095 % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3096 % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3097 % the redefinition. 3098 % 3099 % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3100 \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3101 \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3102 \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3103 \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3104 % 3105 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3106 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3107 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3108 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3109 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3110 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3111 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3112 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3113 % 3114 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3115 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3116 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3117 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3118 % 3119 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3120 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3121 % the same EC font. 3122 \def\ogonek#1{{% 3123 \def\temp{#1}% 3124 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3125 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3126 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3127 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3128 \else 3129 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3130 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3131 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3132 \fi 3133 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3134 }% 3135 } 3136 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3137 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3138 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3139 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3140 % 3141 % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. 3142 \def\ecfont{% 3143 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3144 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3145 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3146 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3147 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3148 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3149 \ifmonospace 3150 % typewriter: 3151 \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3152 \else 3153 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3154 % bold: 3155 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3156 \else 3157 % regular: 3158 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3159 \fi 3160 \fi 3161 \thisecfont 3162 } 3163 3164 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3165 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3166 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3167 % 3168 \def\registeredsymbol{% 3169 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 3170 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3171 }$% 3172 } 3173 3174 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3175 % 3176 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3177 3178 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3179 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3180 % so we'll define it if necessary. 3181 % 3182 \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3183 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3184 \fi 3185 3186 % Quotes. 3187 \chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3188 \chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3189 \chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3190 \chardef\quoteright=`\' 3191 3192 3193 \message{page headings,} 3194 3195 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3196 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3197 3198 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3199 \newif\ifseenauthor 3200 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3201 3202 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 3203 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 3204 % 3205 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3206 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3207 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3208 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3209 3210 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3211 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3212 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3213 3214 \envdef\titlepage{% 3215 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3216 \begingroup 3217 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3218 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3219 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3220 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3221 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3222 % 3223 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3224 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3225 \let\oldpage = \page 3226 \def\page{% 3227 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3228 \finishtitlepage 3229 \fi 3230 \let\page = \oldpage 3231 \page 3232 \null 3233 }% 3234 } 3235 3236 \def\Etitlepage{% 3237 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3238 \finishtitlepage 3239 \fi 3240 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3241 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3242 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3243 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3244 \oldpage 3245 \endgroup 3246 % 3247 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3248 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3249 \HEADINGSon 3250 % 3251 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 3252 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3253 \shortcontents 3254 \contents 3255 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3256 \global\let\contents = \relax 3257 \fi 3258 % 3259 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3260 \contents 3261 \global\let\contents = \relax 3262 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3263 \fi 3264 } 3265 3266 \def\finishtitlepage{% 3267 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3268 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3269 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3270 } 3271 3272 % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3273 % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3274 % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because 3275 % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par 3276 % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3277 % 3278 \def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3279 \rmisbold 3280 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3281 \parindent=0pt 3282 \tolerance=5000 3283 \ptexraggedright 3284 } 3285 3286 % Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3287 3288 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 3289 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3290 3291 \parseargdef\title{% 3292 \checkenv\titlepage 3293 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3294 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3295 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3296 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3297 } 3298 3299 \parseargdef\subtitle{% 3300 \checkenv\titlepage 3301 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3302 } 3303 3304 % @author should come last, but may come many times. 3305 % It can also be used inside @quotation. 3306 % 3307 \parseargdef\author{% 3308 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3309 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3310 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3311 \else 3312 \checkenv\titlepage 3313 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3314 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% 3315 \fi 3316 } 3317 3318 3319 % Set up page headings and footings. 3320 3321 \let\thispage=\folio 3322 3323 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3324 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3325 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3326 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3327 3328 % Now make TeX use those variables 3329 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3330 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3331 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3332 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3333 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3334 3335 % Commands to set those variables. 3336 % For example, this is what @headings on does 3337 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3338 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3339 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3340 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3341 3342 3343 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3344 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3345 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3346 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3347 3348 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3349 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3350 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3351 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3352 3353 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3354 3355 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3356 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3357 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3358 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3359 3360 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3361 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3362 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3363 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3364 % 3365 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3366 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3367 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 3368 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3369 } 3370 3371 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3372 3373 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3374 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3375 % 3376 % The same set of arguments for: 3377 % 3378 % @oddheadingmarks 3379 % @evenfootingmarks 3380 % @oddfootingmarks 3381 % @everyheadingmarks 3382 % @everyfootingmarks 3383 3384 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3385 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3386 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3387 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3388 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3389 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3390 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3391 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3392 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3393 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3394 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3395 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3396 } 3397 3398 \everyheadingmarks bottom 3399 \everyfootingmarks bottom 3400 3401 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3402 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3403 % @headings off turns them off. 3404 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3405 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3406 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3407 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3408 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3409 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3410 3411 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3412 3413 \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3414 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3415 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3416 } 3417 3418 \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3419 \HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3420 3421 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3422 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3423 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3424 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3425 % edge of all pages. 3426 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3427 \global\pageno=1 3428 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3429 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3430 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3431 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3432 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3433 } 3434 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3435 3436 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3437 % page number on top right. 3438 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3439 \global\pageno=1 3440 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3441 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3442 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3443 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3444 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3445 } 3446 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3447 3448 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3449 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3450 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3451 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3452 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3453 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3454 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3455 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3456 } 3457 3458 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3459 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3460 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3461 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3462 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3463 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3464 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3465 } 3466 3467 % Subroutines used in generating headings 3468 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3469 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3470 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3471 \ifx\today\thisisundefined 3472 \def\today{% 3473 \number\day\space 3474 \ifcase\month 3475 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3476 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3477 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3478 \fi 3479 \space\number\year} 3480 \fi 3481 3482 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3483 % It generates no output of its own. 3484 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3485 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3486 3487 3488 \message{tables,} 3489 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3490 3491 % default indentation of table text 3492 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3493 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3494 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3495 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3496 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3497 3498 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3499 \newdimen\itemmax 3500 3501 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3502 % these defs. 3503 % They also define \itemindex 3504 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3505 3506 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3507 3508 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3509 3510 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3511 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3512 3513 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3514 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3515 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3516 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3517 \itemindex{#1}% 3518 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3519 % 3520 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3521 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3522 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3523 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3524 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3525 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3526 % 3527 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3528 % but leave it ragged-right. 3529 \begingroup 3530 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3531 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3532 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3533 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3534 \endgroup 3535 % 3536 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3537 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3538 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3539 % 3540 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3541 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3542 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3543 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3544 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3545 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3546 % 3547 \penalty 10001 3548 \endgroup 3549 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3550 \else 3551 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3552 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3553 \noindent 3554 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3555 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3556 % eventually be printed. 3557 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3558 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3559 \unhbox0 3560 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3561 \endgroup 3562 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3563 \fi 3564 } 3565 3566 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3567 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3568 3569 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3570 \envdef\table{% 3571 \let\itemindex\gobble 3572 \tablecheck{table}% 3573 } 3574 \envdef\ftable{% 3575 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3576 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3577 } 3578 \envdef\vtable{% 3579 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3580 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3581 } 3582 \def\tablecheck#1{% 3583 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3584 \endgroup 3585 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3586 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3587 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3588 \else 3589 \let\next\tablex 3590 \fi 3591 \next 3592 } 3593 \def\tablex#1{% 3594 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3595 \parsearg\tabley 3596 } 3597 \def\tabley#1{% 3598 {% 3599 \makevalueexpandable 3600 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3601 \expandafter 3602 }\temp \endtablez 3603 } 3604 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3605 \aboveenvbreak 3606 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3607 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3608 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3609 \itemmax=\tableindent 3610 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3611 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3612 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3613 \parindent = 0pt 3614 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3615 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3616 \let\item = \internalBitem 3617 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3618 } 3619 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3620 \let\Eftable\Etable 3621 \let\Evtable\Etable 3622 \let\Eitemize\Etable 3623 \let\Eenumerate\Etable 3624 3625 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3626 3627 \newcount \itemno 3628 3629 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3630 3631 \def\doitemize#1{% 3632 \aboveenvbreak 3633 \itemmax=\itemindent 3634 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3635 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3636 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3637 \parindent=0pt 3638 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3639 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3640 % 3641 % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says 3642 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 3643 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 3644 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 3645 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 3646 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3647 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 3648 % 3649 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3650 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3651 % 3652 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3653 } 3654 3655 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3656 % 3657 \def\itemizeitem{% 3658 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3659 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3660 {% 3661 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3662 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3663 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3664 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3665 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3666 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3667 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3668 % that's the theory. 3669 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3670 \noindent 3671 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3672 % 3673 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3674 \flushcr 3675 } 3676 3677 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3678 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3679 % 3680 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3681 3682 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3683 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3684 % argument is the same as `1'. 3685 % 3686 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3687 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3688 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3689 \def\thearg{#1}% 3690 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3691 % 3692 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3693 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3694 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3695 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3696 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3697 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3698 \ifx\rest\empty 3699 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3700 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3701 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3702 % not equal to itself. 3703 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3704 % 3705 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3706 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3707 % 3708 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3709 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3710 \else 3711 % It's a letter. 3712 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3713 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3714 \else 3715 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3716 \fi 3717 \fi 3718 \else 3719 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3720 \numericenumerate 3721 \fi 3722 } 3723 3724 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3725 % given in \thearg. 3726 % 3727 \def\numericenumerate{% 3728 \itemno = \thearg 3729 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3730 } 3731 3732 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3733 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3734 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3735 \startenumeration{% 3736 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3737 \ifnum\itemno=0 3738 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3739 alphabet}% 3740 \fi 3741 \char\lccode\itemno 3742 }% 3743 } 3744 3745 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3746 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3747 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3748 \startenumeration{% 3749 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3750 \ifnum\itemno=0 3751 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3752 alphabet} 3753 \fi 3754 \char\uccode\itemno 3755 }% 3756 } 3757 3758 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3759 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3760 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3761 % 3762 \def\startenumeration#1{% 3763 \advance\itemno by -1 3764 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3765 } 3766 3767 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3768 % to @enumerate. 3769 % 3770 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3771 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3772 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3773 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3774 3775 3776 % @multitable macros 3777 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3778 % 3779 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3780 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3781 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3782 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3783 3784 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3785 3786 % To make preamble: 3787 % 3788 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3789 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3790 % @item ... 3791 % 3792 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3793 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3794 % columns as desired. 3795 3796 3797 % Or use a template: 3798 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3799 % @item ... 3800 % using the widest term desired in each column. 3801 3802 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3803 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3804 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3805 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3806 3807 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3808 % if they are. 3809 3810 % Sample multitable: 3811 3812 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3813 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3814 % @item 3815 % first col stuff 3816 % @tab 3817 % second col stuff 3818 % @tab 3819 % third col 3820 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3821 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3822 % 3823 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3824 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3825 % @end multitable 3826 3827 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3828 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3829 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3830 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3831 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3832 % to baseline. 3833 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3834 % 3835 \newskip\multitableparskip 3836 \newskip\multitableparindent 3837 \newdimen\multitablecolspace 3838 \newskip\multitablelinespace 3839 \multitableparskip=0pt 3840 \multitableparindent=6pt 3841 \multitablecolspace=12pt 3842 \multitablelinespace=0pt 3843 3844 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3845 % 3846 \let\endsetuptable\relax 3847 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3848 \let\columnfractions\relax 3849 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3850 \newif\ifsetpercent 3851 3852 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3853 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3854 % 3855 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3856 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3857 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3858 \setuptable 3859 } 3860 3861 \newcount\colcount 3862 \def\setuptable#1{% 3863 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3864 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3865 \let\go = \relax 3866 \else 3867 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3868 \global\setpercenttrue 3869 \else 3870 \ifsetpercent 3871 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3872 \else 3873 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3874 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3875 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3876 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3877 \fi 3878 \fi 3879 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3880 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3881 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3882 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3883 \else 3884 \let\go = \setuptable 3885 \fi% 3886 \fi 3887 \go 3888 } 3889 3890 % multitable-only commands. 3891 % 3892 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3893 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3894 % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to 3895 % undo it ourselves. 3896 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 3897 \def\headitem{% 3898 \checkenv\multitable 3899 \crcr 3900 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 3901 \the\everytab % for the first item 3902 }% 3903 % 3904 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3905 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3906 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 3907 % --karl, nathan (a] acm.org, 20apr99. 3908 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3909 3910 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3911 % 3912 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3913 % 3914 \envdef\multitable{% 3915 \vskip\parskip 3916 \startsavinginserts 3917 % 3918 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3919 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3920 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3921 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3922 \def\item{\crcr}% 3923 % 3924 \tolerance=9500 3925 \hbadness=9500 3926 \setmultitablespacing 3927 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3928 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3929 \overfullrule=0pt 3930 \global\colcount=0 3931 % 3932 \everycr = {% 3933 \noalign{% 3934 \global\everytab={}% 3935 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3936 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3937 \checkinserts 3938 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3939 %\filbreak 3940 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3941 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3942 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3943 }% 3944 }% 3945 % 3946 \parsearg\domultitable 3947 } 3948 \def\domultitable#1{% 3949 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3950 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3951 % 3952 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3953 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3954 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3955 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3956 \halign\bgroup &% 3957 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3958 \multistrut 3959 \vtop{% 3960 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3961 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3962 % 3963 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3964 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3965 % the first one. 3966 % 3967 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3968 % to the width of each template entry. 3969 % 3970 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3971 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3972 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3973 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3974 % 3975 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3976 \rightskip=0pt 3977 \ifnum\colcount=1 3978 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3979 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3980 \else 3981 \ifsetpercent \else 3982 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3983 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3984 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3985 \fi 3986 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3987 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3988 \fi 3989 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3990 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3991 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3992 % For example: 3993 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3994 % @item @code{#} 3995 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3996 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3997 % marking characters. 3998 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3999 }\cr 4000 } 4001 \def\Emultitable{% 4002 \crcr 4003 \egroup % end the \halign 4004 \global\setpercentfalse 4005 } 4006 4007 \def\setmultitablespacing{% 4008 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4009 % 4010 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4011 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4012 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4013 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4014 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4015 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4016 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4017 \fi 4018 % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4019 % table. If not, do nothing. 4020 % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4021 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4022 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4023 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4024 % than skip between lines in the table. 4025 \fi% 4026 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4027 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4028 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4029 % than skip between lines in the table. 4030 \fi} 4031 4032 4033 \message{conditionals,} 4034 4035 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4036 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4037 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4038 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4039 % attempt to close an environment group. 4040 % 4041 \def\makecond#1{% 4042 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4043 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4044 } 4045 \makecond{iftex} 4046 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4047 \makecond{ifnothtml} 4048 \makecond{ifnotinfo} 4049 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4050 \makecond{ifnotxml} 4051 4052 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4053 % 4054 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4055 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4056 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4057 \def\html{\doignore{html}} 4058 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4059 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4060 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4061 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4062 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4063 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4064 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4065 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4066 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4067 4068 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4069 % 4070 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4071 \newcount\doignorecount 4072 4073 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4074 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4075 \obeylines 4076 \catcode`\@ = \other 4077 \catcode`\{ = \other 4078 \catcode`\} = \other 4079 % 4080 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4081 \spaceisspace 4082 % 4083 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4084 \doignorecount = 0 4085 % 4086 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4087 \dodoignore{#1}% 4088 } 4089 4090 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4091 \obeylines % 4092 % 4093 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4094 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4095 % 4096 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4097 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4098 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4099 % 4100 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4101 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4102 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4103 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4104 % 4105 % And now expand that command. 4106 \doignoretext ^^M% 4107 }% 4108 } 4109 4110 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4111 \def\temp{#1}% 4112 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4113 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4114 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4115 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4116 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4117 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4118 \fi 4119 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4120 } 4121 4122 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4123 % 4124 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4125 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4126 \let\next\enddoignore 4127 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4128 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4129 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4130 \fi 4131 \next 4132 } 4133 4134 % Finish off ignored text. 4135 { \obeylines% 4136 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4137 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4138 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4139 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4140 } 4141 4142 4143 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4144 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4145 % 4146 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4147 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4148 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4149 % didn't need it. 4150 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4151 % 4152 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4153 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4154 {% 4155 \makevalueexpandable 4156 \def\temp{#2}% 4157 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4158 \ifx\temp\empty 4159 \next{}% 4160 \else 4161 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4162 \fi 4163 }% 4164 } 4165 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4166 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4167 4168 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4169 % 4170 \parseargdef\clear{% 4171 {% 4172 \makevalueexpandable 4173 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4174 }% 4175 } 4176 4177 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4178 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4179 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4180 { 4181 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 4182 % 4183 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4184 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4185 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4186 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4187 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4188 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4189 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4190 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 4191 } 4192 } 4193 4194 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4195 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4196 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4197 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4198 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4199 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4200 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4201 % 4202 \def\expandablevalue#1{% 4203 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4204 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4205 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4206 \else 4207 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4208 \fi 4209 } 4210 4211 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4212 % with @set. 4213 % 4214 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 4215 % 4216 \makecond{ifset} 4217 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4218 \def\doifset#1#2{% 4219 {% 4220 \makevalueexpandable 4221 \let\next=\empty 4222 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4223 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4224 \fi 4225 \expandafter 4226 }\next 4227 } 4228 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4229 4230 % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4231 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4232 % 4233 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4234 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4235 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4236 % 4237 \makecond{ifclear} 4238 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4239 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4240 4241 % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4242 % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4243 % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4244 % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4245 % 4246 \makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4247 \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4248 % 4249 \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4250 \makevalueexpandable 4251 \let\next=\empty 4252 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4253 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4254 \fi 4255 \expandafter 4256 }\next 4257 } 4258 \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4259 4260 % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4261 \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4262 \def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4263 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4264 \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4265 4266 % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4267 % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4268 \set txicommandconditionals 4269 4270 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4271 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4272 \let\dircategory=\comment 4273 4274 % @defininfoenclose. 4275 \let\definfoenclose=\comment 4276 4277 4278 \message{indexing,} 4279 % Index generation facilities 4280 4281 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4282 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4283 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4284 4285 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 4286 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that 4287 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 4288 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4289 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 4290 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4291 % for the sake of vms. 4292 % 4293 \def\newindex#1{% 4294 \iflinks 4295 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4296 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 4297 \fi 4298 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4299 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4300 } 4301 4302 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4303 % 4304 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4305 4306 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4307 % 4308 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4309 % 4310 \def\newcodeindex#1{% 4311 \iflinks 4312 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4313 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 4314 \fi 4315 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4316 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4317 } 4318 4319 4320 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4321 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4322 % 4323 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4324 % inside @code. 4325 % 4326 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4327 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4328 4329 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4330 % #3 the target index (bar). 4331 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4332 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 4333 % closing the target index. 4334 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax 4335 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 4336 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 4337 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 4338 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 4339 \fi 4340 % redefine \fooindfile: 4341 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4342 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4343 % redefine \fooindex: 4344 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4345 } 4346 4347 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 4348 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4349 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. 4350 4351 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 4352 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 4353 4354 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 4355 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 4356 4357 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 4358 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4359 4360 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4361 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 4362 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4363 4364 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4365 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 4366 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 4367 % 4368 \def\indexdummies{% 4369 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4370 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 4371 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 4372 % 4373 % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy) 4374 % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more 4375 % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 4376 % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 4377 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we 4378 % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma. 4379 \def\{{{\tt\char123}}% 4380 \def\}{{\tt\char125}}% 4381 % 4382 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 4383 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 4384 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 4385 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 4386 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 4387 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 4388 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 4389 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 4390 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 4391 % 4392 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 4393 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 4394 % @macro funindex {WORD} 4395 % @findex xyz 4396 % @end macro 4397 % ... 4398 % @funindex commtest 4399 % 4400 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 4401 % 4402 % Sample whatsit resulting: 4403 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 4404 % 4405 % So: 4406 \let\endinput = \empty 4407 % 4408 % Do the redefinitions. 4409 \commondummies 4410 } 4411 4412 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 4413 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 4414 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 4415 % this will be simpler. 4416 % 4417 \def\atdummies{% 4418 \def\@{@@}% 4419 \def\ {@ }% 4420 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 4421 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 4422 % 4423 % Do the redefinitions. 4424 \commondummies 4425 \otherbackslash 4426 } 4427 4428 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 4429 % 4430 \def\commondummies{% 4431 % 4432 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4433 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4434 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4435 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4436 % from whatever follows. 4437 % 4438 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4439 % space. 4440 % 4441 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4442 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4443 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4444 % 4445 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 4446 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 4447 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4448 % 4449 \commondummiesnofonts 4450 % 4451 \definedummyletter\_% 4452 \definedummyletter\-% 4453 % 4454 % Non-English letters. 4455 \definedummyword\AA 4456 \definedummyword\AE 4457 \definedummyword\DH 4458 \definedummyword\L 4459 \definedummyword\O 4460 \definedummyword\OE 4461 \definedummyword\TH 4462 \definedummyword\aa 4463 \definedummyword\ae 4464 \definedummyword\dh 4465 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4466 \definedummyword\l 4467 \definedummyword\o 4468 \definedummyword\oe 4469 \definedummyword\ordf 4470 \definedummyword\ordm 4471 \definedummyword\questiondown 4472 \definedummyword\ss 4473 \definedummyword\th 4474 % 4475 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4476 \definedummyword\bf 4477 \definedummyword\gtr 4478 \definedummyword\hat 4479 \definedummyword\less 4480 \definedummyword\sf 4481 \definedummyword\sl 4482 \definedummyword\tclose 4483 \definedummyword\tt 4484 % 4485 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4486 \definedummyword\TeX 4487 % 4488 % Assorted special characters. 4489 \definedummyword\arrow 4490 \definedummyword\bullet 4491 \definedummyword\comma 4492 \definedummyword\copyright 4493 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4494 \definedummyword\dots 4495 \definedummyword\enddots 4496 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4497 \definedummyword\equiv 4498 \definedummyword\error 4499 \definedummyword\euro 4500 \definedummyword\expansion 4501 \definedummyword\geq 4502 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4503 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4504 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4505 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4506 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4507 \definedummyword\leq 4508 \definedummyword\minus 4509 \definedummyword\ogonek 4510 \definedummyword\pounds 4511 \definedummyword\point 4512 \definedummyword\print 4513 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4514 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4515 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4516 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4517 \definedummyword\quoteright 4518 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4519 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4520 \definedummyword\result 4521 \definedummyword\textdegree 4522 % 4523 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4524 \macrolist 4525 % 4526 \normalturnoffactive 4527 % 4528 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4529 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4530 \makevalueexpandable 4531 } 4532 4533 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4534 % 4535 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4536 % Control letters and accents. 4537 \definedummyletter\!% 4538 \definedummyaccent\"% 4539 \definedummyaccent\'% 4540 \definedummyletter\*% 4541 \definedummyaccent\,% 4542 \definedummyletter\.% 4543 \definedummyletter\/% 4544 \definedummyletter\:% 4545 \definedummyaccent\=% 4546 \definedummyletter\?% 4547 \definedummyaccent\^% 4548 \definedummyaccent\`% 4549 \definedummyaccent\~% 4550 \definedummyword\u 4551 \definedummyword\v 4552 \definedummyword\H 4553 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4554 \definedummyword\ogonek 4555 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4556 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4557 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4558 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4559 \definedummyword\dotless 4560 % 4561 % Texinfo font commands. 4562 \definedummyword\b 4563 \definedummyword\i 4564 \definedummyword\r 4565 \definedummyword\sansserif 4566 \definedummyword\sc 4567 \definedummyword\slanted 4568 \definedummyword\t 4569 % 4570 % Commands that take arguments. 4571 \definedummyword\abbr 4572 \definedummyword\acronym 4573 \definedummyword\anchor 4574 \definedummyword\cite 4575 \definedummyword\code 4576 \definedummyword\command 4577 \definedummyword\dfn 4578 \definedummyword\dmn 4579 \definedummyword\email 4580 \definedummyword\emph 4581 \definedummyword\env 4582 \definedummyword\file 4583 \definedummyword\image 4584 \definedummyword\indicateurl 4585 \definedummyword\inforef 4586 \definedummyword\kbd 4587 \definedummyword\key 4588 \definedummyword\math 4589 \definedummyword\option 4590 \definedummyword\pxref 4591 \definedummyword\ref 4592 \definedummyword\samp 4593 \definedummyword\strong 4594 \definedummyword\tie 4595 \definedummyword\uref 4596 \definedummyword\url 4597 \definedummyword\var 4598 \definedummyword\verb 4599 \definedummyword\w 4600 \definedummyword\xref 4601 } 4602 4603 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4604 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4605 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4606 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4607 % 4608 \def\indexnofonts{% 4609 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4610 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4611 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4612 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4613 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 4614 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4615 % 4616 \commondummiesnofonts 4617 % 4618 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4619 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4620 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4621 %\let\tt=\asis 4622 % 4623 \def\ { }% 4624 \def\@{@}% 4625 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4626 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 4627 % 4628 % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the 4629 % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings 4630 % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }. 4631 \def\{{|a}% 4632 \def\lbracechar{|a}% 4633 % 4634 \def\}{|b}% 4635 \def\rbracechar{|b}% 4636 % 4637 % Non-English letters. 4638 \def\AA{AA}% 4639 \def\AE{AE}% 4640 \def\DH{DZZ}% 4641 \def\L{L}% 4642 \def\OE{OE}% 4643 \def\O{O}% 4644 \def\TH{ZZZ}% 4645 \def\aa{aa}% 4646 \def\ae{ae}% 4647 \def\dh{dzz}% 4648 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4649 \def\l{l}% 4650 \def\oe{oe}% 4651 \def\ordf{a}% 4652 \def\ordm{o}% 4653 \def\o{o}% 4654 \def\questiondown{?}% 4655 \def\ss{ss}% 4656 \def\th{zzz}% 4657 % 4658 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4659 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4660 % 4661 % Assorted special characters. 4662 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4663 \def\arrow{->}% 4664 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4665 \def\comma{,}% 4666 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4667 \def\dots{...}% 4668 \def\enddots{...}% 4669 \def\equiv{==}% 4670 \def\error{error}% 4671 \def\euro{euro}% 4672 \def\expansion{==>}% 4673 \def\geq{>=}% 4674 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4675 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4676 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4677 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4678 \def\leq{<=}% 4679 \def\minus{-}% 4680 \def\point{.}% 4681 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4682 \def\print{-|}% 4683 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4684 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4685 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4686 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4687 \def\quoteright{'}% 4688 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4689 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4690 \def\result{=>}% 4691 \def\textdegree{o}% 4692 % 4693 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax 4694 \else \indexlquoteignore \fi 4695 % 4696 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4697 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4698 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4699 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4700 % that starts with \. 4701 % 4702 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4703 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4704 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4705 % 4706 \macrolist 4707 } 4708 4709 % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us 4710 % ignore left quotes in the sort term. 4711 {\catcode`\`=\active 4712 \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}} 4713 4714 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4715 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4716 4717 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4718 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4719 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4720 4721 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4722 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4723 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4724 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4725 % 4726 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4727 \iflinks 4728 {% 4729 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4730 \toks0 = {#2}% 4731 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4732 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4733 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4734 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4735 \fi 4736 % 4737 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4738 % 4739 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4740 }% 4741 \fi 4742 } 4743 4744 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4745 % 4746 \def\dosubindwrite{% 4747 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4748 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4749 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4750 \fi 4751 % 4752 % Remember, we are within a group. 4753 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4754 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4755 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4756 % 4757 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4758 % get the string to sort by. 4759 {\indexnofonts 4760 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4761 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4762 }% 4763 % 4764 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4765 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4766 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4767 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4768 % sorted result. 4769 \edef\temp{% 4770 \write\writeto{% 4771 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4772 }% 4773 \temp 4774 } 4775 4776 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4777 % 4778 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4779 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4780 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4781 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4782 % sequences like this: 4783 % @end defun 4784 % @tindex whatever 4785 % @defun ... 4786 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4787 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4788 % the previous defun. 4789 % 4790 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4791 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4792 % 4793 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4794 % 4795 % But wait, there is a catch there: 4796 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4797 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4798 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4799 % representation of the skip. 4800 % 4801 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4802 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4803 % 4804 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4805 % 4806 \newskip\whatsitskip 4807 \newcount\whatsitpenalty 4808 % 4809 % ..., ready, GO: 4810 % 4811 \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 4812 #1% 4813 \else 4814 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4815 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4816 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4817 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4818 % 4819 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4820 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4821 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4822 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4823 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4824 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4825 \else 4826 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4827 \fi 4828 % 4829 #1% 4830 % 4831 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4832 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4833 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4834 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4835 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4836 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4837 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4838 % @vindex index-whatever 4839 % Description. 4840 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4841 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4842 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4843 \else 4844 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4845 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4846 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4847 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4848 \fi 4849 \fi} 4850 4851 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4852 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4853 % or 4854 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4855 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4856 % containing these kinds of lines: 4857 % \initial {c} 4858 % before the first topic whose initial is c 4859 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4860 % for a topic that is used without subtopics 4861 % \primary {topic} 4862 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4863 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4864 % for each subtopic. 4865 4866 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4867 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4868 4869 \def\findex {\fnindex} 4870 \def\kindex {\kyindex} 4871 \def\cindex {\cpindex} 4872 \def\vindex {\vrindex} 4873 \def\tindex {\tpindex} 4874 \def\pindex {\pgindex} 4875 4876 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4877 {\obeylines % 4878 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4879 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4880 4881 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4882 4883 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4884 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4885 % 4886 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4887 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4888 % 4889 \smallfonts \rm 4890 \tolerance = 9500 4891 \plainfrenchspacing 4892 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4893 % 4894 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4895 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4896 % \initial {@} 4897 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4898 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4899 \catcode`\@ = 11 4900 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4901 \ifeof 1 4902 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4903 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4904 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4905 % there is some text. 4906 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4907 \else 4908 % 4909 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4910 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4911 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4912 \read 1 to \temp 4913 \ifeof 1 4914 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4915 \else 4916 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4917 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4918 % to make right now. 4919 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4920 \catcode`\\ = 0 4921 \escapechar = `\\ 4922 \begindoublecolumns 4923 \input \jobname.#1s 4924 \enddoublecolumns 4925 \fi 4926 \fi 4927 \closein 1 4928 \endgroup} 4929 4930 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4931 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4932 4933 \def\initial#1{{% 4934 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4935 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4936 % 4937 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4938 \removelastskip 4939 % 4940 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4941 \nobreak 4942 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4943 \penalty 0 4944 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4945 % 4946 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4947 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4948 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4949 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4950 % 4951 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4952 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4953 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4954 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4955 \nobreak 4956 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4957 }} 4958 4959 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4960 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4961 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4962 % 4963 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4964 % \def\entry#1#2{... 4965 % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4966 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4967 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4968 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4969 % --kasal, 21nov03 4970 \def\entry{% 4971 \begingroup 4972 % 4973 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4974 % affect previous text. 4975 \par 4976 % 4977 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4978 \parfillskip = 0in 4979 % 4980 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4981 \parskip = 0in 4982 % 4983 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4984 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4985 % 4986 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4987 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4988 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4989 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4990 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4991 % 4992 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4993 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4994 \hangindent = 2em 4995 % 4996 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4997 % with blank space. 4998 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4999 % 5000 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 5001 % columns. 5002 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 5003 % 5004 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5005 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5006 % titles, for instance. 5007 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5008 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% 5009 % 5010 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5011 \afterassignment\doentry 5012 \let\temp = 5013 } 5014 \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5015 \def\doentry{% 5016 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5017 \noindent 5018 \aftergroup\finishentry 5019 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5020 } 5021 \def\finishentry#1{% 5022 % #1 is the page number. 5023 % 5024 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 5025 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 5026 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 5027 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 5028 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 5029 \ % 5030 \else 5031 % 5032 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 5033 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 5034 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 5035 \hfil\penalty50 5036 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5037 % 5038 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 5039 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 5040 % \hbox ensues. 5041 \ifpdf 5042 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5043 \ \the\toksA 5044 \else 5045 \ #1% 5046 \fi 5047 \fi 5048 \par 5049 \endgroup 5050 } 5051 5052 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5053 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5054 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 5055 5056 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5057 5058 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5059 \def\secondary#1#2{{% 5060 \parfillskip=0in 5061 \parskip=0in 5062 \hangindent=1in 5063 \hangafter=1 5064 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5065 \ifpdf 5066 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5067 \else 5068 #2 5069 \fi 5070 \par 5071 }} 5072 5073 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5074 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5075 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5076 \catcode`\@=11 5077 5078 \newbox\partialpage 5079 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5080 5081 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5082 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5083 \output = {% 5084 % 5085 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5086 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5087 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5088 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5089 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5090 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5091 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5092 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5093 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5094 \fi 5095 % 5096 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5097 % Unvbox the main output page. 5098 \unvbox\PAGE 5099 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5100 }% 5101 }% 5102 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5103 % 5104 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5105 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5106 % 5107 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5108 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5109 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5110 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5111 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5112 % 5113 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5114 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5115 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5116 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5117 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5118 % 5119 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5120 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5121 % been clobbered. 5122 % 5123 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5124 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5125 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5126 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5127 % 5128 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 5129 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 5130 \vsize = 2\vsize 5131 } 5132 5133 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5134 % the last. 5135 % 5136 \def\doublecolumnout{% 5137 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5138 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5139 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5140 % previous page. 5141 \dimen@ = \vsize 5142 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5143 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 5144 % 5145 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5146 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 5147 \onepageout\pagesofar 5148 \unvbox255 5149 \penalty\outputpenalty 5150 } 5151 % 5152 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5153 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5154 \def\pagesofar{% 5155 \unvbox\partialpage 5156 % 5157 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5158 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5159 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5160 } 5161 % 5162 % All done with double columns. 5163 \def\enddoublecolumns{% 5164 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5165 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5166 % following situation: 5167 % 5168 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5169 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5170 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5171 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5172 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5173 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5174 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5175 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5176 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5177 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5178 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5179 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5180 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5181 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5182 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5183 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5184 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5185 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 5186 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5187 % 5188 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5189 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5190 \penalty0 5191 % 5192 \output = {% 5193 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 5194 % current page, no automatic page break. 5195 \balancecolumns 5196 % 5197 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 5198 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 5199 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5200 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5201 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 5202 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 5203 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 5204 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5205 }% 5206 \eject 5207 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5208 % 5209 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5210 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5211 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 5212 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 5213 \pagegoal = \vsize 5214 } 5215 % 5216 % Called at the end of the double column material. 5217 \def\balancecolumns{% 5218 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5219 \dimen@ = \ht0 5220 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5221 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5222 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5223 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 5224 \splittopskip = \topskip 5225 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 5226 {% 5227 \vbadness = 10000 5228 \loop 5229 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5230 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5231 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 5232 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5233 \repeat 5234 }% 5235 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 5236 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 5237 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 5238 % 5239 \pagesofar 5240 } 5241 \catcode`\@ = \other 5242 5243 5244 \message{sectioning,} 5245 % Chapters, sections, etc. 5246 5247 % Let's start with @part. 5248 \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5249 \def\partzzz#1{% 5250 \chapoddpage 5251 \null 5252 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5253 \begingroup 5254 \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text 5255 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5256 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5257 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5258 \chapoddpage 5259 \endgroup 5260 } 5261 5262 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5263 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5264 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5265 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5266 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5267 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5268 \newcount\chapno 5269 \newcount\secno \secno=0 5270 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5271 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5272 5273 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5274 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 5275 % 5276 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 5277 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 5278 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 5279 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 5280 % 5281 \def\appendixletter{% 5282 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 5283 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 5284 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 5285 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 5286 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 5287 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 5288 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 5289 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 5290 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 5291 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 5292 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 5293 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 5294 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 5295 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 5296 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 5297 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 5298 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 5299 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 5300 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 5301 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 5302 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 5303 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 5304 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 5305 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 5306 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 5307 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 5308 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 5309 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 5310 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 5311 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 5312 \else\char\the\appendixno 5313 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 5314 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 5315 5316 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 5317 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 5318 % these. @section does likewise. 5319 \def\thischapter{} 5320 \def\thischapternum{} 5321 \def\thischaptername{} 5322 \def\thissection{} 5323 \def\thissectionnum{} 5324 \def\thissectionname{} 5325 5326 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 5327 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 5328 5329 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 5330 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 5331 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 5332 5333 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 5334 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 5335 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 5336 5337 % we only have subsub. 5338 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 5339 % 5340 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 5341 % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 5342 \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 5343 % 5344 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 5345 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 5346 \def\chapheadtype{N} 5347 5348 % Choose a heading macro 5349 % #1 is heading type 5350 % #2 is heading level 5351 % #3 is text for heading 5352 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% 5353 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 5354 \absseclevel=#2 5355 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 5356 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 5357 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 5358 \absseclevel = 0 5359 \else 5360 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 5361 \absseclevel = 3 5362 \fi 5363 \fi 5364 % The heading type: 5365 \def\headtype{#1}% 5366 \if \headtype U% 5367 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 5368 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 5369 \fi 5370 \else 5371 % Check for appendix sections: 5372 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 5373 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 5374 \else 5375 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 5376 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 5377 \fi\fi 5378 \fi 5379 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 5380 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 5381 \def\headtype{U}% 5382 \else 5383 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 5384 \fi 5385 \fi 5386 % Now print the heading: 5387 \if \headtype U% 5388 \ifcase\absseclevel 5389 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 5390 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 5391 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5392 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5393 \fi 5394 \else 5395 \if \headtype A% 5396 \ifcase\absseclevel 5397 \appendixzzz{#3}% 5398 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 5399 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 5400 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5401 \fi 5402 \else 5403 \ifcase\absseclevel 5404 \chapterzzz{#3}% 5405 \or \seczzz{#3}% 5406 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5407 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5408 \fi 5409 \fi 5410 \fi 5411 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5412 } 5413 5414 % an interface: 5415 \def\numhead{\genhead N} 5416 \def\apphead{\genhead A} 5417 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 5418 5419 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 5420 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 5421 % 5422 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 5423 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 5424 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5425 % 5426 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 5427 \def\chapterzzz#1{% 5428 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 5429 % as an @include file. 5430 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5431 \global\advance\chapno by 1 5432 % 5433 % Used for \float. 5434 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 5435 \resetallfloatnos 5436 % 5437 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 5438 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 5439 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 5440 % 5441 % Write the actual heading. 5442 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 5443 % 5444 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 5445 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 5446 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5447 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5448 } 5449 5450 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 5451 % 5452 \def\appendixzzz#1{% 5453 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5454 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 5455 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 5456 \resetallfloatnos 5457 % 5458 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 5459 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 5460 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 5461 % 5462 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 5463 % 5464 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 5465 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 5466 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 5467 } 5468 5469 % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 5470 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 5471 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 5472 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5473 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 5474 % 5475 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 5476 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5477 \resetallfloatnos 5478 % 5479 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 5480 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 5481 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 5482 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 5483 % to be executed, not expanded). 5484 % 5485 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 5486 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 5487 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 5488 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 5489 % the toc entries.) 5490 \toks0 = {#1}% 5491 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 5492 % 5493 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 5494 % 5495 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 5496 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 5497 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 5498 } 5499 5500 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 5501 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 5502 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 5503 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 5504 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 5505 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 5506 \unnmhead0{#1}% 5507 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5508 } 5509 5510 % @top is like @unnumbered. 5511 \let\top\unnumbered 5512 5513 % Sections. 5514 % 5515 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 5516 \def\seczzz#1{% 5517 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5518 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 5519 } 5520 5521 % normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 5522 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 5523 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 5524 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5525 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 5526 } 5527 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection 5528 5529 % normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 5530 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 5531 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 5532 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5533 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 5534 } 5535 5536 % Subsections. 5537 % 5538 % normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 5539 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 5540 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 5541 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5542 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5543 } 5544 5545 % normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 5546 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 5547 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 5548 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5549 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5550 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5551 } 5552 5553 % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 5554 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 5555 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5556 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5557 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5558 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5559 } 5560 5561 % Subsubsections. 5562 % 5563 % normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 5564 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 5565 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5566 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5567 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5568 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5569 } 5570 5571 % normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 5572 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 5573 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5574 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5575 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5576 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5577 } 5578 5579 % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 5580 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 5581 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5582 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5583 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5584 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5585 } 5586 5587 % These macros control what the section commands do, according 5588 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5589 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5590 \let\section = \numberedsec 5591 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5592 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5593 5594 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5595 5596 \def\majorheading{% 5597 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5598 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5599 } 5600 5601 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5602 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5603 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5604 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5605 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5606 } 5607 5608 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5609 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5610 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5611 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5612 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5613 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5614 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5615 5616 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5617 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5618 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5619 5620 % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5621 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5622 5623 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5624 \newskip\chapheadingskip 5625 5626 % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 5627 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5628 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5629 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5630 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5631 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5632 \def\chapoddpage{% 5633 \chappager 5634 \ifodd\pageno \else 5635 \begingroup 5636 \headingsoff 5637 \null 5638 \chappager 5639 \endgroup 5640 \fi 5641 } 5642 5643 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5644 5645 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5646 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5647 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5648 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5649 5650 \def\CHAPPAGon{% 5651 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5652 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5653 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5654 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5655 5656 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5657 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5658 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5659 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5660 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5661 5662 \CHAPPAGon 5663 5664 % Chapter opening. 5665 % 5666 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5667 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5668 % 5669 % To test against our argument. 5670 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5671 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5672 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5673 % 5674 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5675 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5676 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5677 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5678 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5679 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5680 % 5681 \def\temptype{#2}% 5682 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5683 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5684 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5685 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5686 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5687 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5688 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5689 \toks0={#1}% 5690 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5691 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5692 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5693 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 5694 % commands in some of the translations. 5695 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 5696 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5697 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5698 }% 5699 \else 5700 \toks0={#1}% 5701 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5702 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5703 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5704 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 5705 % commands in some of the translations. 5706 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 5707 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5708 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5709 }% 5710 \fi\fi\fi 5711 % 5712 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5713 % the preceding space. 5714 \safewhatsit\domark 5715 % 5716 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5717 \pchapsepmacro 5718 % 5719 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5720 % between here and the heading. 5721 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5722 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5723 \domark 5724 % 5725 {% 5726 \chapfonts \rmisbold 5727 % 5728 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5729 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5730 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5731 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5732 % 5733 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5734 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5735 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5736 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5737 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5738 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5739 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5740 \def\toctype{omit}% 5741 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5742 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5743 \def\toctype{app}% 5744 \else 5745 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5746 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5747 \fi\fi\fi 5748 % 5749 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5750 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5751 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5752 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5753 % 5754 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5755 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5756 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5757 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5758 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5759 \donoderef{#2}% 5760 % 5761 % Typeset the actual heading. 5762 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5763 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5764 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5765 }% 5766 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5767 \nobreak 5768 } 5769 5770 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5771 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5772 \def\centerparameters{% 5773 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5774 \leftskip = \rightskip 5775 \parfillskip = 0pt 5776 } 5777 5778 5779 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5780 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5781 % 5782 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5783 % 5784 \def\unnchfopen #1{% 5785 \chapoddpage 5786 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5787 \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak 5788 } 5789 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5790 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5791 \par\penalty 5000 % 5792 } 5793 \def\centerchfopen #1{% 5794 \chapoddpage 5795 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}% 5796 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5797 } 5798 \def\CHAPFopen{% 5799 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5800 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5801 5802 5803 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5804 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5805 % 5806 \newskip\secheadingskip 5807 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5808 5809 % Subsection titles. 5810 \newskip\subsecheadingskip 5811 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5812 5813 % Subsubsection titles. 5814 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5815 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5816 5817 5818 % Print any size, any type, section title. 5819 % 5820 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5821 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5822 % section number. 5823 % 5824 \def\seckeyword{sec} 5825 % 5826 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5827 {% 5828 \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment. 5829 % 5830 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5831 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold 5832 % 5833 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5834 \def\temptype{#3}% 5835 % 5836 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5837 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5838 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5839 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5840 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5841 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5842 \fi 5843 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5844 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5845 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5846 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5847 \toks0={#1}% 5848 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5849 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5850 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5851 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5852 % commands in some of the translations. 5853 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5854 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5855 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5856 }% 5857 \fi 5858 \else 5859 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5860 \toks0={#1}% 5861 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5862 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5863 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5864 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5865 % commands in some of the translations. 5866 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5867 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5868 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5869 }% 5870 \fi 5871 \fi\fi\fi 5872 % 5873 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 5874 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 5875 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 5876 \par 5877 % 5878 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5879 % the preceding space. 5880 \safewhatsit\domark 5881 % 5882 % Insert space above the heading. 5883 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5884 % 5885 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5886 % between here and the heading. 5887 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5888 \domark 5889 % 5890 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5891 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5892 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5893 \def\toctype{unn}% 5894 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5895 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5896 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5897 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5898 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5899 \def\toctype{omit}% 5900 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5901 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5902 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5903 \def\toctype{app}% 5904 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5905 \else 5906 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5907 \def\toctype{num}% 5908 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5909 \fi\fi\fi 5910 % 5911 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5912 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5913 % 5914 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5915 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5916 \donoderef{#3}% 5917 % 5918 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5919 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5920 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5921 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5922 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5923 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5924 \nobreak 5925 % 5926 % Output the actual section heading. 5927 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 5928 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5929 \unhbox0 #1}% 5930 }% 5931 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5932 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5933 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5934 % 5935 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5936 % was followed by glue. 5937 \nobreak 5938 % 5939 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5940 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5941 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 5942 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 5943 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 5944 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 5945 \vskip-\parskip 5946 % 5947 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 5948 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 5949 % and do the needful. 5950 \penalty 10001 5951 } 5952 5953 5954 \message{toc,} 5955 % Table of contents. 5956 \newwrite\tocfile 5957 5958 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5959 % Called from @chapter, etc. 5960 % 5961 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5962 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5963 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5964 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5965 % destination to jump to. 5966 % 5967 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5968 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5969 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5970 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5971 % 5972 \newif\iftocfileopened 5973 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5974 % 5975 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5976 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5977 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5978 \iftocfileopened\else 5979 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5980 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5981 \fi 5982 % 5983 \iflinks 5984 {\atdummies 5985 \edef\temp{% 5986 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5987 \temp 5988 }% 5989 \fi 5990 \fi 5991 % 5992 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5993 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5994 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5995 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5996 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5997 % `1', and two named `2'. 5998 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5999 } 6000 6001 6002 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6003 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6004 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6005 % 6006 \def\activecatcodes{% 6007 \catcode`\"=\active 6008 \catcode`\$=\active 6009 \catcode`\<=\active 6010 \catcode`\>=\active 6011 \catcode`\\=\active 6012 \catcode`\^=\active 6013 \catcode`\_=\active 6014 \catcode`\|=\active 6015 \catcode`\~=\active 6016 } 6017 6018 6019 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6020 \def\readtocfile{% 6021 \setupdatafile 6022 \activecatcodes 6023 \input \tocreadfilename 6024 } 6025 6026 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6027 \newcount\savepageno 6028 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6029 6030 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6031 % 6032 \def\startcontents#1{% 6033 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6034 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6035 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6036 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege (a] matematik.su.se> 6037 \contentsalignmacro 6038 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6039 % 6040 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6041 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6042 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6043 % 6044 \savepageno = \pageno 6045 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6046 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6047 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6048 % 6049 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6050 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6051 } 6052 6053 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6054 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6055 % 6056 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6057 6058 % Normal (long) toc. 6059 % 6060 \def\contents{% 6061 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6062 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6063 \ifeof 1 \else 6064 \readtocfile 6065 \fi 6066 \vfill \eject 6067 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6068 \ifeof 1 \else 6069 \pdfmakeoutlines 6070 \fi 6071 \closein 1 6072 \endgroup 6073 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6074 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6075 } 6076 6077 % And just the chapters. 6078 \def\summarycontents{% 6079 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6080 % 6081 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6082 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6083 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6084 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6085 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6086 \secfonts 6087 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6088 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6089 \rm 6090 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6091 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6092 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6093 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6094 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6095 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6096 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6097 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6098 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6099 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6100 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6101 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6102 \ifeof 1 \else 6103 \readtocfile 6104 \fi 6105 \closein 1 6106 \vfill \eject 6107 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6108 \endgroup 6109 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6110 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6111 } 6112 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6113 6114 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6115 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6116 % 6117 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6118 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6119 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6120 % But use \hss just in case. 6121 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6122 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6123 % 6124 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6125 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6126 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6127 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6128 % there are before deciding ... 6129 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6130 } 6131 6132 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6133 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6134 % The last argument is the page number. 6135 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6136 6137 % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6138 % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6139 % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6140 \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6141 \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} 6142 % 6143 % Parts, in the short toc. 6144 \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6145 \penalty-300 6146 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6147 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6148 } 6149 6150 % Chapters, in the main contents. 6151 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6152 % 6153 % Chapters, in the short toc. 6154 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6155 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6156 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6157 } 6158 6159 % Appendices, in the main contents. 6160 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6161 % 6162 \def\appendixbox#1{% 6163 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6164 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6165 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6166 % 6167 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6168 6169 % Unnumbered chapters. 6170 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6171 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6172 6173 % Sections. 6174 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6175 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6176 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6177 6178 % Subsections. 6179 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6180 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6181 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6182 6183 % And subsubsections. 6184 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6185 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6186 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6187 6188 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6189 % Same as \defaultparindent. 6190 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6191 6192 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6193 % page number. 6194 % 6195 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6196 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6197 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6198 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6199 \begingroup 6200 \chapentryfonts 6201 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6202 \endgroup 6203 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6204 } 6205 6206 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6207 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6208 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6209 \endgroup} 6210 6211 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6212 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6213 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6214 \endgroup} 6215 6216 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6217 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6218 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6219 \endgroup} 6220 6221 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6222 \let\tocentry = \entry 6223 6224 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6225 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6226 6227 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6228 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6229 6230 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6231 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6232 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6233 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6234 6235 6236 \message{environments,} 6237 % @foo ... @end foo. 6238 6239 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6240 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6241 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6242 6243 \envdef\tex{% 6244 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 6245 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6246 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6247 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6248 \catcode `\%=14 6249 \catcode `\+=\other 6250 \catcode `\"=\other 6251 \catcode `\|=\other 6252 \catcode `\<=\other 6253 \catcode `\>=\other 6254 \catcode`\`=\other 6255 \catcode`\'=\other 6256 \escapechar=`\\ 6257 % 6258 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6259 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6260 \mathactive 6261 % 6262 \let\b=\ptexb 6263 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6264 \let\c=\ptexc 6265 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6266 \let\.=\ptexdot 6267 \let\dots=\ptexdots 6268 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 6269 \let\!=\ptexexclam 6270 \let\i=\ptexi 6271 \let\indent=\ptexindent 6272 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 6273 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 6274 \let\+=\tabalign 6275 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 6276 \let\/=\ptexslash 6277 \let\*=\ptexstar 6278 \let\t=\ptext 6279 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer 6280 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 6281 % 6282 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 6283 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 6284 \def\@{@}% 6285 } 6286 % There is no need to define \Etex. 6287 6288 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 6289 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 6290 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 6291 6292 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 6293 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 6294 6295 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 6296 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 6297 % have any width. 6298 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 6299 6300 % This space is always present above and below environments. 6301 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 6302 6303 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 6304 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 6305 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 6306 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 6307 % 6308 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% 6309 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 6310 % \sectionheading, q.v. 6311 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 6312 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 6313 \endgraf 6314 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 6315 \removelastskip 6316 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 6317 % or better ... 6318 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 6319 \vskip\envskipamount 6320 \fi 6321 \fi 6322 }} 6323 6324 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 6325 6326 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 6327 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 6328 \let\nonarrowing=\relax 6329 6330 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 6331 % environment contents. 6332 \font\circle=lcircle10 6333 \newdimen\circthick 6334 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 6335 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 6336 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 6337 % 6338 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 6339 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 6340 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 6341 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 6342 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6343 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 6344 \hskip\rskip}} 6345 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6346 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 6347 \hskip\rskip}} 6348 % 6349 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 6350 6351 \envdef\cartouche{% 6352 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 6353 \startsavinginserts 6354 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 6355 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 6356 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 6357 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 6358 \cartouter=\hsize 6359 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 6360 % side, and for 6pt waste from 6361 % each corner char, and rule thickness 6362 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 6363 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 6364 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6365 % 6366 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 6367 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 6368 % collide with the section heading. 6369 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 6370 % 6371 \vbox\bgroup 6372 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 6373 \carttop 6374 \hbox\bgroup 6375 \hskip\lskip 6376 \vrule\kern3pt 6377 \vbox\bgroup 6378 \kern3pt 6379 \hsize=\cartinner 6380 \baselineskip=\normbskip 6381 \lineskip=\normlskip 6382 \parskip=\normpskip 6383 \vskip -\parskip 6384 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 6385 } 6386 \def\Ecartouche{% 6387 \ifhmode\par\fi 6388 \kern3pt 6389 \egroup 6390 \kern3pt\vrule 6391 \hskip\rskip 6392 \egroup 6393 \cartbot 6394 \egroup 6395 \checkinserts 6396 } 6397 6398 6399 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 6400 % inside a group. 6401 \newdimen\nonfillparindent 6402 \def\nonfillstart{% 6403 \aboveenvbreak 6404 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 6405 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 6406 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 6407 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 6408 \parskip = 0pt 6409 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 6410 % the normal \indent. 6411 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 6412 \parindent = 0pt 6413 \let\indent\nonfillindent 6414 % 6415 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 6416 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6417 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6418 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 6419 \else 6420 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6421 \fi 6422 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 6423 } 6424 6425 \begingroup 6426 \obeyspaces 6427 % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 6428 % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 6429 % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 6430 % @indent. 6431 \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 6432 \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 6433 \ifx\temp % 6434 \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 6435 \else% 6436 \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 6437 \fi% 6438 }% 6439 \endgroup 6440 \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 6441 \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 6442 6443 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 6444 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 6445 % This affects the following displayed environments: 6446 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp 6447 % 6448 \def\smallword{small} 6449 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} 6450 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax 6451 \def\setnormaldispenv{% 6452 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 6453 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 6454 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 6455 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 6456 % to change the fonts afterward. 6457 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6458 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6459 \fi 6460 } 6461 \def\setsmalldispenv{% 6462 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 6463 \else 6464 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6465 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6466 \fi 6467 } 6468 6469 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 6470 % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 6471 \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 6472 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 6473 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 6474 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6475 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6476 } 6477 6478 % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 6479 \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 6480 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 6481 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 6482 } 6483 % 6484 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 6485 % @example: same as @lisp. 6486 % 6487 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 6488 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 6489 % 6490 \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 6491 \nonfillstart 6492 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 6493 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 6494 \gobble % eat return 6495 } 6496 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 6497 % 6498 \makedispenvdef{display}{% 6499 \nonfillstart 6500 \gobble 6501 } 6502 6503 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 6504 % 6505 \makedispenvdef{format}{% 6506 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6507 \nonfillstart 6508 \gobble 6509 } 6510 6511 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 6512 \envdef\flushleft{% 6513 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6514 \nonfillstart 6515 \gobble 6516 } 6517 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 6518 6519 % @flushright. 6520 % 6521 \envdef\flushright{% 6522 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6523 \nonfillstart 6524 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 6525 \gobble 6526 } 6527 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 6528 6529 6530 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 6531 % justification. From plain.tex. 6532 \envdef\raggedright{% 6533 \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 6534 } 6535 \let\Eraggedright\par 6536 6537 \envdef\raggedleft{% 6538 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 6539 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6540 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6541 % badness reporting. 6542 } 6543 \let\Eraggedleft\par 6544 6545 \envdef\raggedcenter{% 6546 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 6547 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6548 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6549 % badness reporting. 6550 } 6551 \let\Eraggedcenter\par 6552 6553 6554 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 6555 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 6556 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 6557 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 6558 % 6559 \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 6560 % 6561 \def\quotationstart{% 6562 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 6563 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6564 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 6565 \fi 6566 \parsearg\quotationlabel 6567 } 6568 6569 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 6570 % doing normal filling. 6571 % 6572 \def\Equotation{% 6573 \par 6574 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 6575 % indent a bit. 6576 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 6577 \fi 6578 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6579 } 6580 \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 6581 6582 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 6583 \def\quotationlabel#1{% 6584 \def\temp{#1}% 6585 \ifx\temp\empty \else 6586 {\bf #1: }% 6587 \fi 6588 } 6589 6590 % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 6591 % has no optional argument. 6592 % 6593 \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 6594 % 6595 \def\indentedblockstart{% 6596 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 6597 \parindent=0pt 6598 % 6599 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 6600 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6601 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6602 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 6603 \else 6604 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6605 \fi 6606 } 6607 6608 % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 6609 % 6610 \def\Eindentedblock{% 6611 \par 6612 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6613 } 6614 \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 6615 6616 6617 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 6618 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 6619 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 6620 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke (a] gnu.org 6621 % 6622 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6623 % 6624 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6625 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6626 % verbatim line. 6627 \def\dospecials{% 6628 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6629 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6630 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6631 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 6632 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 6633 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 6634 %\do\`\do\'% 6635 } 6636 % 6637 % [Knuth] p. 380 6638 \def\uncatcodespecials{% 6639 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6640 % 6641 % Setup for the @verb command. 6642 % 6643 % Eight spaces for a tab 6644 \begingroup 6645 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6646 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6647 \endgroup 6648 % 6649 \def\setupverb{% 6650 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6651 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6652 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 6653 \tabeightspaces 6654 % Respect line breaks, 6655 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6656 % make each space count 6657 % must do in this order: 6658 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6659 } 6660 6661 % Setup for the @verbatim environment 6662 % 6663 % Real tab expansion. 6664 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6665 % 6666 % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 6667 % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 6668 % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 6669 % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 6670 % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 6671 % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 6672 \newbox\verbbox 6673 \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 6674 % 6675 \begingroup 6676 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6677 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6678 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6679 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6680 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6681 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 6682 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6683 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6684 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 6685 }% 6686 } 6687 \endgroup 6688 6689 % start the verbatim environment. 6690 \def\setupverbatim{% 6691 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6692 \nonfillstart 6693 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6694 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 6695 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 6696 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 6697 \tabexpand 6698 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 6699 % Respect line breaks, 6700 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6701 % make each space count. 6702 % Must do in this order: 6703 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6704 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6705 } 6706 6707 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6708 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6709 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6710 % 6711 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6712 % 6713 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6714 \begingroup 6715 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6716 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6717 \endgroup 6718 % 6719 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6720 % 6721 % 6722 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6723 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6724 % 6725 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6726 % 6727 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6728 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6729 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6730 % 6731 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6732 % 6733 \begingroup 6734 \catcode`\ =\active 6735 \obeylines % 6736 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6737 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6738 % line in the output. 6739 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6740 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6741 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6742 \endgroup 6743 % 6744 \envdef\verbatim{% 6745 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6746 } 6747 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6748 6749 6750 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6751 % 6752 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6753 % 6754 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6755 {% 6756 \makevalueexpandable 6757 \setupverbatim 6758 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 6759 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 6760 \input #1 6761 \afterenvbreak 6762 }% 6763 } 6764 6765 % @copying ... @end copying. 6766 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6767 % 6768 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6769 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6770 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6771 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6772 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6773 % possible is very desirable. 6774 % 6775 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6776 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6777 % 6778 \def\insertcopying{% 6779 \begingroup 6780 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6781 \scanexp\copyingtext 6782 \endgroup 6783 } 6784 6785 6786 \message{defuns,} 6787 % @defun etc. 6788 6789 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6790 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6791 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6792 \newcount\defunpenalty 6793 6794 % Start the processing of @deffn: 6795 \def\startdefun{% 6796 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6797 \medbreak 6798 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6799 % following @def command, see below. 6800 \else 6801 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6802 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6803 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6804 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6805 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6806 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6807 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6808 % 6809 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6810 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6811 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6812 % @def command. 6813 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6814 % 6815 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6816 % But do insert the glue. 6817 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6818 \fi 6819 % 6820 \parindent=0in 6821 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6822 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6823 } 6824 6825 \def\dodefunx#1{% 6826 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6827 \checkenv#1% 6828 % 6829 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6830 % It's not a great place, though. 6831 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6832 % 6833 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6834 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6835 } 6836 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6837 6838 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6839 % 6840 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6841 \begingroup 6842 % call \deffnheader: 6843 #1#2 \endheader 6844 % common ending: 6845 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6846 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 6847 \endgraf 6848 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6849 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6850 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6851 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6852 \checkparencounts 6853 \endgroup 6854 } 6855 6856 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6857 6858 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6859 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 6860 % 6861 \def\makedefun#1{% 6862 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6863 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6864 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6865 \temp 6866 } 6867 6868 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6869 % 6870 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6871 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6872 % 6873 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6874 \envdef#1{% 6875 \startdefun 6876 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 6877 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6878 }% 6879 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6880 \def#3% 6881 } 6882 6883 \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 6884 \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 6885 6886 % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 6887 % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 6888 % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 6889 % 6890 \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 6891 \def\temp{#1}% 6892 \ifx\temp\onword 6893 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6894 = \empty 6895 \else\ifx\temp\offword 6896 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6897 = \relax 6898 \else 6899 \errhelp = \EMsimple 6900 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 6901 must be on|off}% 6902 \fi\fi 6903 } 6904 6905 % Untyped functions: 6906 6907 % @deffn category name args 6908 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6909 6910 % @deffn category class name args 6911 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6912 6913 % \defopon {category on}class name args 6914 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6915 6916 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6917 % 6918 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6919 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6920 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6921 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6922 } 6923 6924 % Typed functions: 6925 6926 % @deftypefn category type name args 6927 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6928 6929 % @deftypeop category class type name args 6930 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6931 6932 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6933 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6934 6935 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6936 % 6937 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6938 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6939 \doingtypefntrue 6940 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6941 } 6942 6943 % Typed variables: 6944 6945 % @deftypevr category type var args 6946 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6947 6948 % @deftypecv category class type var args 6949 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6950 6951 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6952 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6953 6954 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6955 % 6956 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6957 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6958 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6959 } 6960 6961 % Untyped variables: 6962 6963 % @defvr category var args 6964 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6965 6966 % @defcv category class var args 6967 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6968 6969 % \defcvof {category of}class var args 6970 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6971 6972 % Types: 6973 6974 % @deftp category name args 6975 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6976 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6977 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6978 } 6979 6980 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6981 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6982 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6983 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6984 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6985 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6986 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6987 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6988 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6989 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6990 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6991 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6992 6993 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6994 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6995 % #2 is the return type, if any. 6996 % #3 is the function name. 6997 % 6998 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6999 % 7000 \def\defname#1#2#3{% 7001 \par 7002 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7003 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7004 % 7005 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7006 % on a line by itself. 7007 \rettypeownlinefalse 7008 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7009 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7010 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7011 \rettypeownlinetrue 7012 \fi 7013 \fi 7014 % 7015 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7016 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7017 % just below it. 7018 \def\temp{#1}% 7019 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7020 % 7021 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7022 % least two. 7023 \tempnum = 2 7024 % 7025 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7026 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7027 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7028 % 7029 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7030 \ifrettypeownline 7031 \advance\tempnum by 1 7032 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7033 \else 7034 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7035 \fi 7036 % 7037 % The continuations: 7038 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7039 % 7040 % The final paragraph shape: 7041 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7042 % 7043 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7044 \noindent 7045 \hbox to 0pt{% 7046 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7047 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7048 \kern\leftskip 7049 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7050 }% 7051 % 7052 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7053 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7054 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7055 {% 7056 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7057 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7058 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7059 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7060 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7061 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7062 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7063 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7064 \df \tt 7065 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7066 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7067 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7068 \ifrettypeownline 7069 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7070 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7071 \else 7072 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7073 \fi 7074 \fi % no return type 7075 #3% output function name 7076 }% 7077 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 7078 % 7079 \boldbrax 7080 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7081 } 7082 7083 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7084 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7085 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7086 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7087 % 7088 \def\defunargs#1{% 7089 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7090 % tt for the names. 7091 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7092 % 7093 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7094 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7095 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7096 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7097 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7098 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7099 #1% 7100 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7101 } 7102 7103 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7104 % 7105 \def\activeparens{% 7106 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7107 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7108 \catcode`\&=\active 7109 } 7110 7111 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7112 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7113 7114 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7115 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7116 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7117 { 7118 \activeparens 7119 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7120 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7121 \global\let& = \& 7122 7123 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7124 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7125 } 7126 7127 \newcount\parencount 7128 7129 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7130 \newif\ifampseen 7131 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7132 7133 \def\parenfont{% 7134 \ifampseen 7135 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7136 % otherwise use the default font. 7137 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7138 \else 7139 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7140 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7141 \sf 7142 \fi 7143 } 7144 \def\infirstlevel#1{% 7145 \ifampseen 7146 \ifnum\parencount=1 7147 #1% 7148 \fi 7149 \fi 7150 } 7151 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7152 7153 \def\opnr{% 7154 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7155 {\parenfont(}% 7156 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7157 } 7158 \def\clnr{% 7159 {\parenfont)}% 7160 \infirstlevel \sl 7161 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7162 } 7163 7164 \newcount\brackcount 7165 \def\lbrb{% 7166 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7167 {\bf[}% 7168 } 7169 \def\rbrb{% 7170 {\bf]}% 7171 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7172 } 7173 7174 \def\checkparencounts{% 7175 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7176 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7177 } 7178 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7179 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7180 \def\badparencount{% 7181 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7182 \global\parencount=0 7183 } 7184 \def\badbrackcount{% 7185 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7186 \global\brackcount=0 7187 } 7188 7189 7190 \message{macros,} 7191 % @macro. 7192 7193 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7194 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7195 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7196 \newwrite\macscribble 7197 \def\scantokens#1{% 7198 \toks0={#1}% 7199 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7200 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7201 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7202 \input \jobname.tmp 7203 } 7204 \fi 7205 7206 \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup 7207 \newlinechar`\^^M 7208 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 7209 % 7210 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 7211 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 7212 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 7213 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 7214 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 7215 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 7216 % 7217 % ... and for \example: 7218 \spaceisspace 7219 % 7220 % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as 7221 % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not 7222 % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two 7223 % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX 7224 % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in 7225 % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and 7226 % line-oriented commands. 7227 % 7228 \scantokens{#1\empty}% 7229 \endgroup} 7230 7231 \def\scanexp#1{% 7232 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 7233 \temp 7234 } 7235 7236 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 7237 \newtoks\macname % Macro name 7238 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 7239 7240 % List of all defined macros in the form 7241 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 7242 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 7243 % if there is a need. 7244 \def\macrolist{} 7245 7246 % Add the macro to \macrolist 7247 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 7248 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 7249 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 7250 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 7251 } 7252 7253 % Utility routines. 7254 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 7255 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 7256 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). 7257 % 7258 \def\cslet#1#2{% 7259 \expandafter\let 7260 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 7261 \csname#2\endcsname 7262 } 7263 7264 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 7265 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 7266 {\catcode`\@=11 7267 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 7268 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 7269 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 7270 \def\unbrace#1{#1} 7271 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 7272 } 7273 7274 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 7275 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 7276 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 7277 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 7278 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 7279 } 7280 7281 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 7282 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 7283 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 7284 % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 7285 % 7286 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 7287 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 7288 % confine the change to the current group. 7289 % 7290 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 7291 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 7292 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 7293 % 7294 \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 7295 \catcode`\"=\other 7296 \catcode`\+=\other 7297 \catcode`\<=\other 7298 \catcode`\>=\other 7299 \catcode`\@=\other 7300 \catcode`\^=\other 7301 \catcode`\_=\other 7302 \catcode`\|=\other 7303 \catcode`\~=\other 7304 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 7305 } 7306 7307 \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 7308 \scanctxt 7309 \catcode`\\=\other 7310 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7311 } 7312 7313 \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 7314 \scanctxt 7315 \catcode`\{=\other 7316 \catcode`\}=\other 7317 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7318 \usembodybackslash 7319 } 7320 7321 \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations 7322 \scanctxt 7323 \catcode`\\=0 7324 } 7325 % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes" 7326 % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands" 7327 % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document. 7328 % 7329 % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for 7330 % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we 7331 % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls): 7332 % 7333 \def\\{\normalbackslash}% 7334 % 7335 % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does. 7336 % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a 7337 % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead. 7338 % 7339 % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind. 7340 7341 7342 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 7343 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 7344 % where N is the macro parameter number. 7345 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 7346 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 7347 % 7348 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 7349 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 7350 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 7351 } 7352 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 7353 7354 \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 7355 7356 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 7357 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 7358 7359 \def\macroxxx#1{% 7360 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 7361 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 7362 \paramno=0\relax 7363 \else 7364 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 7365 \if\paramno>256\relax 7366 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7367 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7368 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 7369 \fi 7370 \fi 7371 \fi 7372 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 7373 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 7374 \else 7375 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 7376 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 7377 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 7378 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 7379 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 7380 \fi 7381 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 7382 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 7383 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 7384 \fi} 7385 7386 \parseargdef\unmacro{% 7387 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 7388 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 7389 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 7390 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 7391 \begingroup 7392 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 7393 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 7394 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 7395 \endgroup 7396 \else 7397 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 7398 \fi 7399 } 7400 7401 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 7402 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 7403 % 7404 \def\unmacrodo#1{% 7405 \ifx #1\relax 7406 % remove this 7407 \else 7408 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 7409 \fi 7410 } 7411 7412 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 7413 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 7414 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 7415 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 7416 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 7417 \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 7418 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 7419 7420 % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names. 7421 \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 7422 \catcode `@=11\relax 7423 7424 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 7425 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH 7426 % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If 7427 % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 7428 % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 7429 % defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 7430 % 7431 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 7432 % 7433 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 7434 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 7435 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 7436 % it to # just before using the token list produced. 7437 % 7438 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 7439 % the macro is used. 7440 % 7441 % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 7442 % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 7443 % processed again to replace the arguments. 7444 % 7445 % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 7446 % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 7447 % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input). 7448 % 7449 % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 7450 % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an 7451 % error is produced. 7452 \def\parsemargdef#1;{% 7453 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 7454 \let\hash\relax 7455 \let\xeatspaces\relax 7456 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 7457 % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 7458 % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 7459 % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 7460 % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 7461 % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 7462 % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 7463 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 7464 \paramno0\relax 7465 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 7466 \fi 7467 } 7468 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 7469 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7470 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 7471 \advance\paramno by 1 7472 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 7473 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 7474 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 7475 \fi\next} 7476 7477 \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 7478 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7479 \else 7480 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 7481 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 7482 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 7483 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 7484 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 7485 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 7486 % \xdef . 7487 \expandafter\edef\tempa 7488 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 7489 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7490 \fi\next} 7491 7492 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 7493 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 7494 % 7495 7496 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode 7497 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 7498 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7499 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 7500 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7501 \catcode `\@=11\relax 7502 7503 \let\endargs@\relax 7504 \let\nil@\relax 7505 \def\nilm@{\nil@}% 7506 \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 7507 7508 % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 7509 % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros 7510 % macarg.ARGNAME 7511 % 7512 % #1 is the macro name 7513 % #2 is the list of argument names 7514 % #3 is the list of argument values 7515 \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 7516 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 7517 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 7518 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 7519 \def\macroname{#1}% 7520 \begingroup 7521 \macroargctxt 7522 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 7523 \def\@tempa{#3}% 7524 \ifx\@tempa\empty 7525 \setemptyargvalues@ 7526 \else 7527 \getargvals@@ 7528 \fi 7529 } 7530 7531 % 7532 \def\getargvals@@{% 7533 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7534 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 7535 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7536 \else 7537 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7538 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 7539 \fi 7540 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7541 \else 7542 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7543 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 7544 % macros to empty. 7545 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7546 \else 7547 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 7548 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 7549 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 7550 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 7551 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 7552 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 7553 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 7554 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 7555 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7556 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 7557 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 7558 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 7559 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 7560 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 7561 \let\next\getargvals@@ 7562 \fi 7563 \fi 7564 \next 7565 } 7566 7567 \def\push@#1#2{% 7568 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 7569 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 7570 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 7571 \expandafter#1#2}% 7572 } 7573 7574 % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 7575 % in macro \@tempa 7576 \def\macvalstoargs@{% 7577 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 7578 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 7579 % values into respective token registers. 7580 % 7581 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 7582 \begingroup 7583 \paramno0\relax 7584 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 7585 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 7586 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 7587 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 7588 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 7589 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 7590 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 7591 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 7592 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 7593 % group. 7594 \expandafter 7595 \endgroup 7596 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7597 } 7598 7599 \def\macargexpandinbody@{% 7600 %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 7601 \expandafter 7602 \endgroup 7603 \macargdeflist@ 7604 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 7605 % is in \@tempa . 7606 \macvalstoargs@ 7607 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 7608 % with \@tempb . 7609 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 7610 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 7611 % \egroup . 7612 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 7613 \let\@tempc\relax 7614 \else 7615 \let\@tempc\egroup 7616 \fi 7617 % And now we do the real job: 7618 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 7619 \@tempd 7620 } 7621 7622 \def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 7623 \if#1;\let\next\relax 7624 \else 7625 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 7626 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 7627 % alias \@tempb . 7628 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 7629 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 7630 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 7631 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 7632 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7633 \fi 7634 \next 7635 } 7636 7637 % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1 7638 \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}} 7639 % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1 7640 \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax} 7641 % newtoks that can be used non \outer . 7642 \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi} 7643 7644 % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty 7645 \def\setemptyargvalues@{% 7646 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7647 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7648 \else 7649 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 7650 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7651 \fi 7652 \next 7653 } 7654 7655 \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 7656 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 7657 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 7658 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 7659 \def\paramlist{#2}% 7660 } 7661 7662 % #1 is the element target macro 7663 % #2 is the list macro 7664 % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 7665 \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7666 \def#1{#3}% 7667 \def#2{#4}% 7668 } 7669 \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7670 \long\def#1{#3}% 7671 \long\def#2{#4}% 7672 } 7673 7674 % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and 7675 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 7676 % Much magic with \expandafter here. 7677 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 7678 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 7679 % 7680 \def\defmacro{% 7681 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 7682 \ifrecursive 7683 \ifcase\paramno 7684 % 0 7685 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7686 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7687 \or % 1 7688 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7689 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7690 \noexpand\braceorline 7691 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7692 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7693 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7694 \else 7695 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9 7696 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7697 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7698 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7699 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7700 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7701 \expandafter\expandafter 7702 \expandafter\xdef 7703 \expandafter\expandafter 7704 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7705 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7706 \else % 10 or more 7707 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7708 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7709 }% 7710 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7711 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 7712 \fi 7713 \fi 7714 \else 7715 \ifcase\paramno 7716 % 0 7717 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7718 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7719 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7720 \or % 1 7721 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7722 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7723 \noexpand\braceorline 7724 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7725 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7726 \egroup 7727 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7728 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7729 \else % at most 9 7730 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 7731 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7732 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7733 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7734 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7735 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7736 \expandafter\expandafter 7737 \expandafter\xdef 7738 \expandafter\expandafter 7739 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7740 \paramlist{% 7741 \egroup 7742 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7743 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7744 \else % 10 or more: 7745 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7746 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7747 }% 7748 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7749 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse 7750 \fi 7751 \fi 7752 \fi} 7753 7754 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax 7755 7756 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 7757 7758 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 7759 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 7760 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 7761 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg). 7762 % 7763 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 7764 \def\braceorlinexxx{% 7765 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 7766 \expandafter\parsearg 7767 \fi \macnamexxx} 7768 7769 7770 % @alias. 7771 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 7772 % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 7773 % 7774 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 7775 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 7776 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 7777 {% 7778 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 7779 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 7780 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 7781 }% 7782 \next 7783 } 7784 7785 7786 \message{cross references,} 7787 7788 \newwrite\auxfile 7789 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 7790 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 7791 7792 % @inforef is relatively simple. 7793 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 7794 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 7795 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 7796 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 7797 7798 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 7799 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 7800 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 7801 % @node foo , bar , ... 7802 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 7803 % 7804 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 7805 % 7806 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 7807 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 7808 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 7809 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 7810 7811 \let\nwnode=\node 7812 \let\lastnode=\empty 7813 7814 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 7815 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 7816 % 7817 \def\donoderef#1{% 7818 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 7819 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 7820 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 7821 \fi 7822 } 7823 7824 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 7825 % 7826 \newcount\savesfregister 7827 % 7828 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 7829 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 7830 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 7831 7832 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 7833 % anchor), which consists of three parts: 7834 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 7835 % or the anchor name. 7836 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 7837 % empty for anchors. 7838 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 7839 % 7840 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 7841 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 7842 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 7843 % 7844 \def\setref#1#2{% 7845 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 7846 \iflinks 7847 {% 7848 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 7849 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 7850 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 7851 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 7852 }% 7853 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 7854 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 7855 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 7856 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 7857 }% 7858 \fi 7859 } 7860 7861 % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 7862 % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 7863 % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 7864 % variable, now it's official. 7865 % 7866 \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 7867 \def\temp{#1}% 7868 \ifx\temp\onword 7869 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7870 = \empty 7871 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7872 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7873 = \relax 7874 \else 7875 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7876 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 7877 must be on|off}% 7878 \fi\fi 7879 } 7880 7881 % 7883 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 7884 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 7885 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 7886 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 7887 % 7888 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7889 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7890 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7891 % 7892 \newbox\toprefbox 7893 \newbox\printedrefnamebox 7894 \newbox\infofilenamebox 7895 \newbox\printedmanualbox 7896 % 7897 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 7898 \unsepspaces 7899 % 7900 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 7901 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 7902 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 7903 % 7904 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 7905 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 7906 % 7907 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 7908 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 7909 % 7910 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 7911 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 7912 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 7913 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 7914 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 7915 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 7916 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7917 \else 7918 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 7919 % the square brackets if we have it. 7920 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 7921 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 7922 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7923 \else 7924 \ifhavexrefs 7925 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 7926 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 7927 \else 7928 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 7929 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7930 \fi% 7931 \fi 7932 \fi 7933 \fi 7934 % 7935 % Make link in pdf output. 7936 \ifpdf 7937 {\indexnofonts 7938 \turnoffactive 7939 \makevalueexpandable 7940 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 7941 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 7942 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 7943 \getfilename{#4}% 7944 % 7945 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 7946 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 7947 \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 7948 \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty 7949 \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets 7950 \else 7951 \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars 7952 \fi 7953 % 7954 \leavevmode 7955 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 7956 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 7957 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 7958 \else 7959 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 7960 \fi 7961 }% 7962 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 7963 \fi 7964 % 7965 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 7966 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 7967 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 7968 {% 7969 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 7970 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 7971 \indexnofonts 7972 \turnoffactive 7973 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 7974 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 7975 }% 7976 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 7977 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 7978 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 7979 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 7980 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 7981 \else 7982 \printedrefname 7983 \fi 7984 % 7985 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 7986 % "in MANUALNAME". 7987 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 7988 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7989 \fi 7990 \else 7991 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7992 % 7993 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 7994 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 7995 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7996 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 7997 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 7998 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7999 % 8000 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8001 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8002 % 8003 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8004 % 8005 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8006 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8007 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8008 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8009 % 8010 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8011 % 8012 \else 8013 % Reference within this manual. 8014 % 8015 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8016 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8017 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8018 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8019 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8020 {\turnoffactive 8021 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8022 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8023 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8024 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8025 }% 8026 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8027 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8028 % 8029 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8030 ,\space 8031 % 8032 % output the `page 3'. 8033 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8034 \fi\fi 8035 \fi 8036 \endlink 8037 \endgroup} 8038 8039 % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8040 % 8041 % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8042 % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8043 % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8044 % 8045 % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8046 % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8047 % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8048 % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8049 % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8050 % 8051 % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8052 % reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8053 % 8054 \def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8055 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8056 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8057 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8058 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8059 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8060 \fi 8061 \fi 8062 #1% 8063 } 8064 8065 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 8066 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 8067 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 8068 % one that Bob is working on :). 8069 % 8070 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 8071 8072 % Things referred to by \setref. 8073 % 8074 \def\Ynothing{} 8075 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} 8076 \def\Ynumbered{% 8077 \ifnum\secno=0 8078 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 8079 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8080 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 8081 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8082 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8083 \else 8084 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8085 \fi\fi\fi 8086 } 8087 \def\Yappendix{% 8088 \ifnum\secno=0 8089 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 8090 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8091 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 8092 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8093 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8094 \else 8095 \putwordSection@tie 8096 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8097 \fi\fi\fi 8098 } 8099 8100 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 8101 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 8102 % 8103 \def\refx#1#2{% 8104 {% 8105 \indexnofonts 8106 \otherbackslash 8107 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 8108 \csname XR#1\endcsname 8109 }% 8110 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 8111 % If not defined, say something at least. 8112 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 8113 \iflinks 8114 \ifhavexrefs 8115 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 8116 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 8117 \else 8118 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 8119 \global\warnedxrefstrue 8120 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 8121 \fi 8122 \fi 8123 \fi 8124 \else 8125 % It's defined, so just use it. 8126 \thisrefX 8127 \fi 8128 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 8129 } 8130 8131 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 8132 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 8133 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 8134 % 8135 \def\xrdef#1#2{% 8136 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 8137 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 8138 % mess up the control sequence name. 8139 \indexnofonts 8140 \turnoffactive 8141 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 8142 }% 8143 % 8144 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 8145 % 8146 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 8147 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 8148 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 8149 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 8150 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 8151 % 8152 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 8153 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 8154 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 8155 \else 8156 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 8157 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 8158 \fi 8159 % 8160 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 8161 % for later use in \listoffloats. 8162 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 8163 {\safexrefname}}% 8164 \fi 8165 } 8166 8167 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 8168 % 8169 \def\tryauxfile{% 8170 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 8171 \ifeof 1 \else 8172 \readdatafile{aux}% 8173 \global\havexrefstrue 8174 \fi 8175 \closein 1 8176 } 8177 8178 \def\setupdatafile{% 8179 \catcode`\^^@=\other 8180 \catcode`\^^A=\other 8181 \catcode`\^^B=\other 8182 \catcode`\^^C=\other 8183 \catcode`\^^D=\other 8184 \catcode`\^^E=\other 8185 \catcode`\^^F=\other 8186 \catcode`\^^G=\other 8187 \catcode`\^^H=\other 8188 \catcode`\^^K=\other 8189 \catcode`\^^L=\other 8190 \catcode`\^^N=\other 8191 \catcode`\^^P=\other 8192 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 8193 \catcode`\^^R=\other 8194 \catcode`\^^S=\other 8195 \catcode`\^^T=\other 8196 \catcode`\^^U=\other 8197 \catcode`\^^V=\other 8198 \catcode`\^^W=\other 8199 \catcode`\^^X=\other 8200 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 8201 \catcode`\^^[=\other 8202 \catcode`\^^\=\other 8203 \catcode`\^^]=\other 8204 \catcode`\^^^=\other 8205 \catcode`\^^_=\other 8206 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 8207 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 8208 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 8209 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 8210 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 8211 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 8212 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 8213 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 8214 % 8215 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 8216 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 8217 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 8218 % 8219 \catcode`\^=\other 8220 % 8221 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 8222 \catcode`\~=\other 8223 \catcode`\[=\other 8224 \catcode`\]=\other 8225 \catcode`\"=\other 8226 \catcode`\_=\other 8227 \catcode`\|=\other 8228 \catcode`\<=\other 8229 \catcode`\>=\other 8230 \catcode`\$=\other 8231 \catcode`\#=\other 8232 \catcode`\&=\other 8233 \catcode`\%=\other 8234 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 8235 % 8236 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 8237 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 8238 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 8239 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 8240 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 8241 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 8242 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 8243 \catcode`\\=\other 8244 % 8245 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 8246 {% 8247 \count1=128 8248 \def\loop{% 8249 \catcode\count1=\other 8250 \advance\count1 by 1 8251 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 8252 }% 8253 }% 8254 % 8255 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 8256 \catcode`\{=1 8257 \catcode`\}=2 8258 \catcode`\@=0 8259 } 8260 8261 \def\readdatafile#1{% 8262 \begingroup 8263 \setupdatafile 8264 \input\jobname.#1 8265 \endgroup} 8266 8267 8268 \message{insertions,} 8269 % including footnotes. 8270 8271 \newcount \footnoteno 8272 8273 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 8274 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 8275 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 8276 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 8277 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 8278 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 8279 8280 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 8281 \let\footnotestyle=\comment 8282 8283 {\catcode `\@=11 8284 % 8285 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 8286 \gdef\footnote{% 8287 \let\indent=\ptexindent 8288 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 8289 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 8290 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 8291 % 8292 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 8293 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 8294 \let\@sf\empty 8295 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 8296 % 8297 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 8298 \unskip 8299 \thisfootno\@sf 8300 \dofootnote 8301 }% 8302 8303 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 8304 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 8305 % 8306 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 8307 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 8308 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 8309 % 8310 \gdef\dofootnote{% 8311 \insert\footins\bgroup 8312 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 8313 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 8314 % So reset some parameters. 8315 \hsize=\pagewidth 8316 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 8317 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 8318 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 8319 \floatingpenalty\@MM 8320 \leftskip\z@skip 8321 \rightskip\z@skip 8322 \spaceskip\z@skip 8323 \xspaceskip\z@skip 8324 \parindent\defaultparindent 8325 % 8326 \smallfonts \rm 8327 % 8328 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 8329 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 8330 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 8331 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 8332 \let\noindent = \relax 8333 % 8334 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 8335 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 8336 \everypar = {\hang}% 8337 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 8338 % 8339 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 8340 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 8341 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 8342 \footstrut 8343 % 8344 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 8345 \futurelet\next\fo@t 8346 } 8347 }%end \catcode `\@=11 8348 8349 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 8350 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 8351 % would be lost. 8352 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 8353 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 8354 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 8355 8356 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 8357 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 8358 % out prematurely. 8359 % 8360 \def\startsavinginserts{% 8361 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 8362 \let\insert\saveinsert 8363 \else 8364 \let\checkinserts\relax 8365 \fi 8366 } 8367 8368 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 8369 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 8370 % 8371 \def\saveinsert#1{% 8372 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 8373 \afterassignment\next 8374 % swallow the left brace 8375 \let\temp = 8376 } 8377 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 8378 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 8379 8380 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 8381 8382 \def\placesaveins#1{% 8383 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 8384 {\box#1}% 8385 } 8386 8387 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 8388 { 8389 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 8390 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 8391 } 8392 8393 % initialization: 8394 \def\newsaveins #1{% 8395 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 8396 \next 8397 } 8398 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% 8399 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 8400 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 8401 \checksaveins #1}% 8402 } 8403 8404 % initialize: 8405 \let\checkinserts\empty 8406 \newsaveins\footins 8407 \newsaveins\margin 8408 8409 8410 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 8411 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 8412 % 8413 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 8414 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 8415 % undone and the next image would fail. 8416 \openin 1 = epsf.tex 8417 \ifeof 1 \else 8418 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 8419 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 8420 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 8421 \input epsf.tex 8422 \fi 8423 \closein 1 8424 % 8425 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 8426 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf 8427 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 8428 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 8429 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 8430 % 8431 \def\image#1{% 8432 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 8433 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 8434 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 8435 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 8436 \global\warnednoepsftrue 8437 \fi 8438 \else 8439 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 8440 \fi 8441 } 8442 % 8443 % Arguments to @image: 8444 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 8445 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 8446 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 8447 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 8448 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 8449 \newif\ifimagevmode 8450 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 8451 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 8452 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 8453 % If the image is by itself, center it. 8454 \ifvmode 8455 \imagevmodetrue 8456 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 8457 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 8458 \imagevmodetrue 8459 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 8460 \fi\fi 8461 % 8462 \ifimagevmode 8463 \nobreak\medskip 8464 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 8465 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 8466 % above and below. 8467 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 8468 \nobreak 8469 \fi 8470 % 8471 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 8472 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 8473 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 8474 % normal paragraph indentation. 8475 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 8476 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 8477 % eradicate the centering. 8478 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 8479 % 8480 % Output the image. 8481 \ifpdf 8482 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 8483 \else 8484 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 8485 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 8486 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 8487 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 8488 \fi 8489 % 8490 \ifimagevmode 8491 \medskip % space after a standalone image 8492 \fi 8493 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 8494 \endgroup} 8495 8496 8497 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 8498 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 8499 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 8500 % 8501 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 8502 8503 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 8504 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 8505 8506 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 8507 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 8508 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 8509 % 8510 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 8511 % be referable. 8512 % 8513 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 8514 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 8515 % 8516 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 8517 % chapter-level command. 8518 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 8519 % 8520 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 8521 \let\thiscaption=\empty 8522 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 8523 % 8524 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 8525 % 8526 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 8527 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 8528 % 8529 \startsavinginserts 8530 % 8531 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 8532 \par 8533 % 8534 \vtop\bgroup 8535 \def\floattype{#1}% 8536 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 8537 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 8538 % 8539 \ifx\floattype\empty 8540 \let\safefloattype=\empty 8541 \else 8542 {% 8543 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8544 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8545 \indexnofonts 8546 \turnoffactive 8547 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8548 }% 8549 \fi 8550 % 8551 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 8552 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8553 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 8554 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 8555 % 8556 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 8557 \global\advance\floatno by 1 8558 % 8559 {% 8560 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 8561 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 8562 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 8563 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 8564 % lists of floats. 8565 % 8566 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 8567 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 8568 }% 8569 \fi 8570 % 8571 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 8572 \vskip\parskip 8573 % 8574 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 8575 \restorefirstparagraphindent 8576 } 8577 8578 % we have these possibilities: 8579 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 8580 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 8581 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 8582 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo 8583 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 8584 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 8585 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 8586 % @float & no caption: 8587 % 8588 \def\Efloat{% 8589 \let\floatident = \empty 8590 % 8591 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 8592 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 8593 % 8594 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 8595 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8596 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 8597 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 8598 \fi 8599 % the number. 8600 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8601 \fi 8602 % 8603 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 8604 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 8605 \let\captionline = \floatident 8606 % 8607 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 8608 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 8609 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 8610 \fi 8611 % 8612 % caption text. 8613 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 8614 \fi 8615 % 8616 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 8617 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 8618 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 8619 \vskip.5\parskip 8620 \captionline 8621 % 8622 % Space below caption. 8623 \vskip\parskip 8624 \fi 8625 % 8626 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 8627 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 8628 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8629 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 8630 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 8631 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 8632 {% 8633 \atdummies 8634 % 8635 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 8636 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 8637 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 8638 \scanexp{% 8639 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 8640 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 8641 \thiscaption 8642 \else 8643 \thisshortcaption 8644 \fi 8645 }% 8646 }% 8647 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 8648 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 8649 }% 8650 \fi 8651 \egroup % end of \vtop 8652 % 8653 % place the captured inserts 8654 % 8655 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 8656 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 8657 % float. --kasal, 26may04 8658 % 8659 \checkinserts 8660 } 8661 8662 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 8663 % 8664 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 8665 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 8666 } 8667 8668 % @caption, @shortcaption 8669 % 8670 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 8671 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 8672 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 8673 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 8674 8675 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 8676 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 8677 \def\getfloatno#1{% 8678 \ifx#1\relax 8679 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 8680 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 8681 % 8682 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 8683 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 8684 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 8685 \fi 8686 \let\floatno#1% 8687 } 8688 8689 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 8690 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 8691 % first read the @float command. 8692 % 8693 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8694 8695 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 8696 % distinguish floats from other xref types. 8697 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 8698 8699 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 8700 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 8701 % \lastsection value which we \setref above. 8702 % 8703 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 8704 % 8705 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 8706 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 8707 % 8708 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 8709 \def\temp{#1}% 8710 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 8711 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 8712 } 8713 8714 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 8715 % 8716 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% 8717 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 8718 {% 8719 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8720 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8721 \indexnofonts 8722 \turnoffactive 8723 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8724 }% 8725 % 8726 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 8727 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 8728 \ifhavexrefs 8729 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 8730 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 8731 \fi 8732 \else 8733 \begingroup 8734 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 8735 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 8736 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 8737 \endgroup 8738 \fi 8739 } 8740 8741 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 8742 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 8743 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 8744 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 8745 % 8746 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 8747 % they won't appear in the aux file). 8748 % 8749 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 8750 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 8751 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 8752 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 8753 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 8754 % in pdf output. 8755 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 8756 % 8757 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 8758 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 8759 \writeentry 8760 }} 8761 8762 8763 \message{localization,} 8764 8765 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 8766 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 8767 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 8768 % 8769 { 8770 \catcode`\_ = \active 8771 \globaldefs=1 8772 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 8773 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 8774 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 8775 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 8776 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8777 \ifeof 1 8778 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 8779 \else 8780 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8781 \input txi-#1.tex 8782 \fi 8783 \closein 1 8784 \endgroup % end raw TeX 8785 \endgroup} 8786 % 8787 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 8788 % try txi-de.tex. 8789 % 8790 \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 8791 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8792 \ifeof 1 8793 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 8794 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 8795 \else 8796 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8797 \input txi-#1.tex 8798 \fi 8799 \closein 1 8800 } 8801 }% end of special _ catcode 8802 % 8803 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 8804 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 8805 directory should work if nowhere else does.} 8806 8807 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 8808 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 8809 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 8810 % 8811 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 8812 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 8813 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 8814 % 8815 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 8816 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 8817 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 8818 % accented characters problem.) 8819 % 8820 \catcode`@=11 8821 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 8822 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 8823 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 8824 \message{no patterns for #1}% 8825 \else 8826 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 8827 \fi 8828 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 8829 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 8830 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 8831 } 8832 8833 % Helpers for encodings. 8834 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 8835 % 8836 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 8837 \count255=128 8838 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8839 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 8840 \advance\count255 by 1 8841 \repeat 8842 } 8843 8844 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 8845 \count255=128 8846 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8847 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 8848 \advance\count255 by 1 8849 \repeat 8850 } 8851 8852 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 8853 % according to the specified encoding. 8854 % 8855 \parseargdef\documentencoding{% 8856 % Encoding being declared for the document. 8857 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 8858 % 8859 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 8860 % to compare them with \ifx. 8861 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 8862 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 8863 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 8864 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 8865 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 8866 % 8867 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 8868 \asciichardefs 8869 % 8870 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 8871 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8872 \lattwochardefs 8873 % 8874 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 8875 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8876 \latonechardefs 8877 % 8878 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 8879 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8880 \latninechardefs 8881 % 8882 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 8883 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8884 \utfeightchardefs 8885 % 8886 \else 8887 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 8888 % 8889 \fi % utfeight 8890 \fi % latnine 8891 \fi % latone 8892 \fi % lattwo 8893 \fi % ascii 8894 } 8895 8896 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 8897 % the default font encoding (OT1). 8898 % 8899 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 8900 8901 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 8902 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 8903 8904 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 8905 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 8906 % macros containing the character definitions. 8907 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8908 % 8909 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 8910 \def\latonechardefs{% 8911 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 8912 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 8913 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 8914 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 8915 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 8916 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 8917 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 8918 \gdef^^a7{\S} 8919 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 8920 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 8921 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 8922 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} 8923 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 8924 \gdef^^ad{\-} 8925 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 8926 \gdef^^af{\={}} 8927 % 8928 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 8929 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 8930 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 8931 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 8932 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 8933 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 8934 \gdef^^b6{\P} 8935 % 8936 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 8937 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 8938 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 8939 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 8940 % 8941 \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright} 8942 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 8943 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 8944 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 8945 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 8946 % 8947 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 8948 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8949 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8950 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 8951 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8952 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 8953 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 8954 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8955 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 8956 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8957 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 8958 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8959 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 8960 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8961 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8962 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 8963 % 8964 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 8965 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 8966 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 8967 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8968 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8969 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 8970 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8971 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8972 \gdef^^d8{\O} 8973 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 8974 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8975 \gdef^^db{\^U} 8976 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8977 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8978 \gdef^^de{\TH} 8979 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8980 % 8981 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 8982 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8983 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8984 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 8985 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8986 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 8987 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 8988 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8989 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 8990 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8991 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 8992 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8993 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 8994 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 8995 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 8996 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 8997 % 8998 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 8999 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 9000 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 9001 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9002 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9003 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 9004 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9005 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9006 \gdef^^f8{\o} 9007 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 9008 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9009 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 9010 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9011 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9012 \gdef^^fe{\th} 9013 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 9014 } 9015 9016 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 9017 \def\latninechardefs{% 9018 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 9019 \latonechardefs 9020 % 9021 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 9022 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 9023 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 9024 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 9025 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 9026 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 9027 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 9028 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 9029 } 9030 9031 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 9032 \def\lattwochardefs{% 9033 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 9034 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 9035 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 9036 \gdef^^a3{\L} 9037 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 9038 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 9039 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 9040 \gdef^^a7{\S} 9041 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 9042 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 9043 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 9044 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 9045 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 9046 \gdef^^ad{\-} 9047 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 9048 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 9049 % 9050 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 9051 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 9052 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 9053 \gdef^^b3{\l} 9054 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 9055 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 9056 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 9057 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 9058 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9059 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 9060 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 9061 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 9062 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 9063 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 9064 \gdef^^be{\v z} 9065 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 9066 % 9067 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 9068 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 9069 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 9070 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 9071 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 9072 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 9073 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 9074 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 9075 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 9076 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 9077 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 9078 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 9079 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 9080 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 9081 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 9082 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 9083 % 9084 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 9085 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 9086 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 9087 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 9088 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 9089 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 9090 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 9091 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 9092 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 9093 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 9094 \gdef^^da{\'U} 9095 \gdef^^db{\H U} 9096 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 9097 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 9098 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 9099 \gdef^^df{\ss} 9100 % 9101 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 9102 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 9103 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 9104 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 9105 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 9106 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 9107 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 9108 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 9109 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 9110 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 9111 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 9112 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 9113 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 9114 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9115 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9116 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 9117 % 9118 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 9119 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 9120 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 9121 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9122 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9123 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 9124 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9125 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9126 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 9127 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 9128 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9129 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 9130 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9131 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9132 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 9133 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 9134 } 9135 9136 % UTF-8 character definitions. 9137 % 9138 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 9139 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 9140 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 9141 % 9142 \newcount\countUTFx 9143 \newcount\countUTFy 9144 \newcount\countUTFz 9145 9146 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 9147 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 9148 % 9149 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 9150 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 9151 % 9152 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 9153 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 9154 9155 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 9156 \ifx #1\relax 9157 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 9158 \else 9159 \expandafter #1% 9160 \fi 9161 } 9162 9163 \begingroup 9164 \catcode`\~13 9165 \catcode`\"12 9166 9167 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 9168 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 9169 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 9170 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 9171 \advance\countUTFx by 1 9172 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 9173 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 9174 \fi} 9175 9176 \countUTFx = "C2 9177 \countUTFy = "E0 9178 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9179 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 9180 \UTFviiiLoop 9181 9182 \countUTFx = "E0 9183 \countUTFy = "F0 9184 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9185 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 9186 \UTFviiiLoop 9187 9188 \countUTFx = "F0 9189 \countUTFy = "F4 9190 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9191 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 9192 \UTFviiiLoop 9193 \endgroup 9194 9195 \begingroup 9196 \catcode`\"=12 9197 \catcode`\<=12 9198 \catcode`\.=12 9199 \catcode`\,=12 9200 \catcode`\;=12 9201 \catcode`\!=12 9202 \catcode`\~=13 9203 9204 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 9205 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 9206 %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 9207 \begingroup 9208 \parseXMLCharref 9209 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 9210 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 9211 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 9212 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 9213 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 9214 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 9215 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9216 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9217 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 9218 \endgroup} 9219 9220 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 9221 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 9222 \errhelp = \EMsimple 9223 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 9224 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 9225 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9226 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 9227 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 9228 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9229 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9230 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 9231 \else 9232 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9233 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9234 \parseUTFviiiA!% 9235 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 9236 \fi\fi\fi 9237 } 9238 9239 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 9240 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 9241 \divide\countUTFz by 64 9242 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 9243 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 9244 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 9245 \advance\countUTFx by 128 9246 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 9247 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 9248 9249 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 9250 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 9251 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 9252 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 9253 \endgroup 9254 9255 \def\utfeightchardefs{% 9256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 9257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 9258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 9259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 9260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 9261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 9262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 9263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 9264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 9265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 9266 9267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 9268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 9269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 9270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 9271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 9272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 9273 9274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 9275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 9276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 9277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 9278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 9279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 9280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 9281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 9282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 9283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 9284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 9285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 9286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 9287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 9288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 9289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 9290 9291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} 9292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 9293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 9294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 9295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 9296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 9297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 9298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 9299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 9300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 9301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 9302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 9303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 9304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} 9305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 9306 9307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 9308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 9309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 9310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 9311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 9312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 9313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 9314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 9315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 9316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 9317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 9318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 9319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 9320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 9323 9324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} 9325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 9326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 9327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 9328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 9329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 9330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 9331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 9332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 9333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 9334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 9335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 9336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 9337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} 9338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 9339 9340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 9341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 9342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 9343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 9344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} 9345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} 9346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 9347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 9348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 9349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 9350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} 9351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} 9352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 9353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 9354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 9355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 9356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 9357 9358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 9359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 9360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 9361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 9362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 9363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 9364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 9365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 9366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 9367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 9368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 9369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 9370 9371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 9372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 9373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 9374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 9375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 9376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 9377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 9378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 9379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 9380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 9381 9382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 9383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 9384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 9385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 9386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 9387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 9388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 9389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 9390 9391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 9392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 9393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 9394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 9395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 9396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 9397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 9398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 9399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 9400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 9401 9402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 9403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 9404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 9405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 9406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 9407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 9408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 9409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 9410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 9411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 9412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 9413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 9414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 9415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 9416 9417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 9418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 9419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 9420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 9421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 9422 9423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 9424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 9425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 9426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 9427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 9428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 9429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 9430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 9431 9432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 9433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 9434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 9435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 9436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 9437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 9438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 9439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 9440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 9441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 9442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 9443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 9444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 9445 9446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 9447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 9448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 9449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 9450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 9451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 9452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 9453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 9454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 9455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 9456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 9457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 9458 9459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 9460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 9461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 9462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 9463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 9464 9465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 9466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 9467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 9468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 9469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 9470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 9471 9472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 9473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 9474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 9475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 9476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 9477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 9478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 9479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 9480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 9481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 9482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 9483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 9484 9485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 9486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 9487 9488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 9489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 9490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 9491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 9492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 9493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 9494 9495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 9496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 9497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 9498 9499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} 9500 9501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 9502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 9503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 9504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 9505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 9506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 9507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 9508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 9509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 9510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 9511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 9512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 9513 9514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 9515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 9516 9517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 9518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 9519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 9520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 9521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 9522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 9523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 9524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 9525 9526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 9527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 9528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 9529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 9530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 9531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 9532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 9533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 9534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 9535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 9536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 9537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 9538 9539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 9540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 9541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 9542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 9543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 9544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 9545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 9546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 9547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 9548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 9549 9550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 9551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 9552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 9553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 9554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 9555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 9556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 9557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 9558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 9559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 9560 9561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 9562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 9563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 9564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 9565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 9566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 9567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 9568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 9569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 9570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 9571 9572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 9573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 9574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 9575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 9576 9577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 9578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 9579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 9580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 9581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 9582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 9583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 9584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 9585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 9586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 9587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 9588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 9589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 9590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 9591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 9592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 9593 9594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 9595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 9596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 9597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 9598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 9599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 9600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 9601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 9602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 9603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 9604 9605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 9606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 9607 9608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 9609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 9610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 9611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 9612 9613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 9614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 9615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 9616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 9617 9618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 9619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 9620 9621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 9622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 9623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 9624 9625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 9626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 9627 9628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 9629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 9630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 9631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 9632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 9633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 9634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 9635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 9636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 9637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 9638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 9639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 9640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 9641 9642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 9643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 9644 9645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 9646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 9647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 9648 }% end of \utfeightchardefs 9649 9650 9651 % US-ASCII character definitions. 9652 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 9653 \relax 9654 } 9655 9656 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 9657 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 9658 % document encoding. 9659 % 9660 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other 9661 9662 9663 \message{formatting,} 9664 9665 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 9666 9667 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 9668 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 9669 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 9670 9671 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 9672 \vbadness = 10000 9673 9674 % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 9675 \hbadness = 6666 9676 9677 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 9678 \widowpenalty=10000 9679 \clubpenalty=10000 9680 9681 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 9682 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 9683 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 9684 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 9685 % 9686 \def\setemergencystretch{% 9687 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 9688 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 9689 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 9690 \else 9691 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 9692 \fi 9693 } 9694 9695 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 9696 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 9697 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 9698 % 9699 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 9700 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 9701 % 9702 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 9703 \voffset = #3\relax 9704 \topskip = #6\relax 9705 \splittopskip = \topskip 9706 % 9707 \vsize = #1\relax 9708 \advance\vsize by \topskip 9709 \outervsize = \vsize 9710 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 9711 \pageheight = \vsize 9712 % 9713 \hsize = #2\relax 9714 \outerhsize = \hsize 9715 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 9716 \pagewidth = \hsize 9717 % 9718 \normaloffset = #4\relax 9719 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 9720 % 9721 \ifpdf 9722 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 9723 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 9724 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 9725 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 9726 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 9727 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 9728 \fi 9729 % 9730 \setleading{\textleading} 9731 % 9732 \parindent = \defaultparindent 9733 \setemergencystretch 9734 } 9735 9736 % @letterpaper (the default). 9737 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9738 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9739 \textleading = 13.2pt 9740 % 9741 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 9742 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 9743 {\voffset}{.25in}% 9744 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 9745 {11in}{8.5in}% 9746 }} 9747 9748 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 9749 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9750 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 9751 \textleading = 12pt 9752 % 9753 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 9754 {-.2in}{0in}% 9755 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 9756 {9.25in}{7in}% 9757 % 9758 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 9759 \tolerance = 700 9760 \hfuzz = 1pt 9761 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9762 \defbodyindent = .5cm 9763 }} 9764 9765 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 9766 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 9767 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9768 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 9769 \textleading = 12pt 9770 % 9771 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 9772 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 9773 {0pt}{14pt}% 9774 {9in}{6in}% 9775 % 9776 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 9777 \tolerance = 700 9778 \hfuzz = 1pt 9779 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9780 \defbodyindent = .4cm 9781 }} 9782 9783 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 9784 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9785 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9786 \textleading = 13.2pt 9787 % 9788 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 9789 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 9790 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 9791 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 9792 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 9793 % your texinfo source file like this: 9794 % @tex 9795 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 9796 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 9797 % @end tex 9798 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 9799 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9800 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9801 {297mm}{210mm}% 9802 % 9803 \tolerance = 700 9804 \hfuzz = 1pt 9805 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9806 \defbodyindent = 5mm 9807 }} 9808 9809 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 9810 % From romildo (a] urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 9811 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 9812 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9813 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 9814 \textleading = 12.5pt 9815 % 9816 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 9817 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9818 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 9819 {210mm}{148mm}% 9820 % 9821 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 9822 \tolerance = 800 9823 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 9824 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9825 \defbodyindent = 2mm 9826 \tableindent = 12mm 9827 }} 9828 9829 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 9830 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 9831 \afourpaper 9832 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 9833 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 9834 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9835 {297mm}{210mm}% 9836 % 9837 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 9838 \globaldefs = 0 9839 }} 9840 9841 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 9842 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 9843 \afourpaper 9844 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 9845 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 9846 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9847 {297mm}{210mm}% 9848 \globaldefs = 0 9849 }} 9850 9851 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 9852 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 9853 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 9854 % 9855 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 9856 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 9857 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 9858 \globaldefs = 1 9859 % 9860 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9861 \setleading{\textleading}% 9862 % 9863 \dimen0 = #1\relax 9864 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 9865 % 9866 \dimen2 = \hsize 9867 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 9868 % 9869 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 9870 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 9871 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9872 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 9873 }} 9874 9875 % Set default to letter. 9876 % 9877 \letterpaper 9878 9879 9880 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 9881 9882 \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 9883 9884 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 9885 \catcode`\^^? = 14 9886 9887 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 9888 \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 9889 \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 9890 \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 9891 \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 9892 \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 9893 \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 9894 \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 9895 \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 9896 \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 9897 9898 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 9899 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 9900 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. 9901 % 9902 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 9903 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 9904 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 9905 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 9906 % 9907 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9908 9909 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 9910 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 9911 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 9912 % this is not a problem. 9913 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9914 9915 % Turn off all special characters except @ 9916 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 9917 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 9918 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 9919 9920 \catcode`\"=\active 9921 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 9922 \let"=\activedoublequote 9923 \catcode`\~=\active 9924 \def~{{\tt\char126}} 9925 \chardef\hat=`\^ 9926 \catcode`\^=\active 9927 \def^{{\tt \hat}} 9928 9929 \catcode`\_=\active 9930 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 9931 \let\realunder=_ 9932 % Subroutine for the previous macro. 9933 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 9934 9935 \catcode`\|=\active 9936 \def|{{\tt\char124}} 9937 \chardef \less=`\< 9938 \catcode`\<=\active 9939 \def<{{\tt \less}} 9940 \chardef \gtr=`\> 9941 \catcode`\>=\active 9942 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} 9943 \catcode`\+=\active 9944 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 9945 \catcode`\$=\active 9946 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 9947 9948 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 9949 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 9950 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 9951 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 9952 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 9953 9954 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 9955 % parsing them. 9956 \def\turnoffactive{% 9957 \normalturnoffactive 9958 \otherbackslash 9959 } 9960 9961 \catcode`\@=0 9962 9963 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 9964 % as in \char`\\. 9965 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 9966 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 9967 9968 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 9969 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 9970 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 9971 9972 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 9973 % in fixed width font. 9974 \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 9975 9976 % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont 9977 % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char 9978 % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets 9979 % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always 9980 % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 9981 % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 9982 % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 9983 % usual hex value because it has already been made active. 9984 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 9985 @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 9986 9987 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 9988 % @let \ = @normalbackslash 9989 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 9990 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 9991 % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 9992 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 9993 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 9994 9995 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 9996 % the literal character `\'. 9997 % 9998 @def@normalturnoffactive{% 9999 @let"=@normaldoublequote 10000 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 10001 @let+=@normalplus 10002 @let<=@normalless 10003 @let>=@normalgreater 10004 @let\=@normalbackslash 10005 @let^=@normalcaret 10006 @let_=@normalunderscore 10007 @let|=@normalverticalbar 10008 @let~=@normaltilde 10009 @markupsetuplqdefault 10010 @markupsetuprqdefault 10011 @unsepspaces 10012 } 10013 10014 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 10015 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 10016 @otherifyactive 10017 10018 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 10019 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 10020 % a backslash. 10021 % 10022 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 10023 @global@let\ = @eatinput 10024 10025 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 10026 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 10027 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 10028 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 10029 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 10030 % 10031 @gdef@fixbackslash{% 10032 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 10033 @catcode`+=@active 10034 @catcode`@_=@active 10035 } 10036 10037 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 10038 @escapechar = `@@ 10039 10040 % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 10041 % active definitions as the normal characters. 10042 @def@normaldot{.} 10043 @def@normalquest{?} 10044 @def@normalslash{/} 10045 10046 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 10047 % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 10048 @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 10049 @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 10050 @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 10051 10052 @let @hashchar = @normalhash 10053 10054 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 10055 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 10056 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 10057 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 10058 @catcode`@'=@active 10059 @catcode`@`=@active 10060 @markupsetuplqdefault 10061 @markupsetuprqdefault 10062 10063 @c Local variables: 10064 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 10065 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 10066 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 10067 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 10068 @c time-stamp-end: "}" 10069 @c End: 10070 10071 @c vim:sw=2: 10072 10073 @ignore 10074 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 10075 @end ignore 10076
